diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/67216-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67216-0.txt | 9046 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9046 deletions
diff --git a/old/67216-0.txt b/old/67216-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 9764aa9..0000000 --- a/old/67216-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9046 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of A United States Midshipman in the -South Seas, by Yates Stirling - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: A United States Midshipman in the South Seas - -Author: Yates Stirling - -Illustrator: Ralph L. Boyer - -Release Date: January 21, 2022 [eBook #67216] - -Language: English - -Produced by: D A Alexander, David E. Brown, with special thanks to the - Research Manager at the St. Louis Public Library, Rare - Books Collection, St. Louis, Missouri, for providing the - high quality scan of the original cover, and the Online - Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This - file was produced from images generously made available by - the Library of Congress) - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN IN -THE SOUTH SEAS *** - - -[Illustration: “ISN’T IT WORTH COMING FOR?”] - - - - - A - UNITED STATES - MIDSHIPMAN - IN THE - SOUTH SEAS - - _by_ - - Lt. Com. Yates Stirling Jr. U.S.N. - - Author of - “A U.S. Midshipman Afloat” - “A U.S. Midshipman in China” - “A U.S. Midshipman in the Philippines” - “A U.S. Midshipman in Japan” - - [Illustration] - - Illustrated _by_ Ralph L. Boyer - - THE PENN PUBLISHING - COMPANY PHILADELPHIA - MCMXIII - - - - - COPYRIGHT - 1913 BY - THE PENN - PUBLISHING - COMPANY - - [Illustration] - - - - -_During the process of empire building, even to-day carried on by the -great powers, the far distant South Sea Islands received their share of -attention from designing cabinets._ - -_In their patriotic desire to further the cause of their country many -sailors laid down their lives in battles with the natives._ - -_These small wars are scarcely remembered at home, but in the islands -where the rivalry between the nations was bitterest, there stand -impressive monuments to these sailor heroes, and in their songs the -chivalrous islanders praise the virtues of their fallen foes._ - -_To the sailors of all nations who thus met death, fighting in their -country’s cause, these pages are dedicated._ - - - - -Introduction - - -In this story Midshipmen Phil Perry and Sydney Monroe, together with -Boatswain’s Mate “Jack” O’Neil, act through an historic drama of a -South Sea war. - -The same characters have seen active service in many parts of the world. - -In “A United States Midshipman Afloat,” life in a battle-ship of the -Atlantic fleet, together with a typical South American revolution, -furnished the setting. In “A United States Midshipman in China,” the -midshipmen and O’Neil help to rescue an American Mission and put an -end to a “Boxer” uprising. In “A United States Midshipman in the -Philippines,” the same officers see very active service on board a -gun-boat in coöperation with the army against the Filipino insurgents. - -In “A United States Midshipman in Japan,” they discover a plot to bring -the United States and Japan into open hostilities over the purchase of -some foreign war-ships. War is narrowly averted through the detective -work of the midshipmen and their Japanese classmate at Annapolis, but -now a lieutenant in the Imperial Navy. - -The present volume carries the midshipmen through further thrilling -scenes that occurred in an island of the far-away South Seas. The -portrayal of native life is faithful and many of the incidents are -historic. - - - - -Contents - - - I. THE RIVAL CHIEFS 11 - - II. DISCORD AMONG THE WHITES 23 - - III. PLOTTING FOR POWER 44 - - IV. CAPTAIN “BULLY” SCOTT AND HIS MATE 58 - - V. THE “TALOFA” IN UKULA 81 - - VI. THE “TALOFA’S” CARGO 103 - - VII. THE KAPUAN FIRM 112 - - VIII. AVAO, TAPAU OF UKULA 131 - - IX. O’NEIL’S OPINION 145 - - X. RUMORS OF WAR 165 - - XI. HIGH CHIEF KATAAFA 183 - - XII. SMUGGLED ARMS 202 - - XIII. UKULA ATTACKED 221 - - XIV. COUNT ROSEN TAKES CHARGE 240 - - XV. THE “DE FACTO” GOVERNMENT 259 - - XVI. CARL KLINGER 277 - - XVII. BEN STUMP LISTENS 293 - - XVIII. A “CUTTING OUT” EXPEDITION 310 - - XIX. A REËNFORCEMENT 327 - - XX. THE TABLES TURNED 345 - - XXI. A RECONNAISSANCE 362 - - XXII. WAR IN EARNEST 377 - - XXIII. CONCLUSION 395 - - - - -Illustrations - - - PAGE - - “ISN’T IT WORTH COMING FOR?” _Frontispiece_ - - THREE AMERICAN OFFICERS WERE STANDING IN THE ROAD 51 - - “I WANT ABOUT A DOZEN SAILORS” 128 - - HE BEGAN AT ONCE TO WAVE IT 204 - - “YOU ARE SIMPLY A BULLY!” 281 - - “IS IT QUITE CLEAR?” THE ADMIRAL ASKED 329 - - HE DID NOT FIRE 385 - - - - -A United States Midshipman in the South Seas - - - - -CHAPTER I - -THE RIVAL CHIEFS - - -A man-of-war boat propelled by six sailormen and with the flag of the -United States flying from its staff navigated the tortuous channel -through the fringing coral reef and landed upon the sandy beach of the -harbor of Ukula. - -Three American naval officers from the cruiser “Sitka” stepped from the -boat upon the shore. - -In the great public square on Kulinuu Point at one end of the town many -thousands of the natives of the Kapuan Islands had gathered. They had -come from all the villages of the islands by special invitation from -the Herzovinian consul for the purpose of giving welcome to their great -war chief Kataafa, who had but just returned from five long years of -exile in a foreign land. - -Toward this assemblage the three officers bent their steps. They were -shown to their chairs by obsequious Herzovinian sailors and found -themselves placed with the English officers from their war-ship in -port. The Herzovinian officers sat close to their consul, who, in all -the splendor of a court uniform, his chest covered with medals, was -enthroned under a bower of freshly cut shrubs and flowers. - -The American captain, Commander Tazewell, regarded the Herzovinian -officials, a twinkle of merriment in his eyes. - -“All their paint and powder is on thick,” he said, smiling -good-humoredly, to his two companions, Midshipmen Philip Perry and -Sydney Monroe, who had accompanied him ashore to be present at this -novel ceremony. - -Phil was gazing with open-eyed admiration at the handsome islanders. - -“I mean the Herzovinian officers,” Commander Tazewell added. “It’s -a hot day for special full dress uniform, but ‘noblesse oblige,’ I -suppose.” - -The American consul, Mr. Lee, accompanied by the chief justice of -Kapua, Judge Lindsay, walked solemnly behind their sailor escort and -seated themselves in chairs reserved for them between the English and -American officers. Their ladies were escorted to seats in another stand. - -Mr. Lee remained standing until the two young women who had accompanied -him had been shown seats, then he sat down with an audible exclamation -of annoyance. - -“Judge,” he exclaimed, “be prepared to be outraged. I know these -pig-headed Herzovinians well enough to appreciate that they never do -things half-way.” - -“We were fools to come and be insulted,” the judge snapped, removing -his soft “Panama” and wiping his moist forehead. “Look at that stand of -theirs; looks like a Christmas tree--the very thing to catch the savage -eye. Here are we in our democratic simplicity.” - -The two midshipmen gazed about; the wonderful spectacle delighted them. -Several thousands of Kapuan men and women collected in mathematical -accuracy had formed a great square about the Herzovinian officials. In -front were the women, garbed in colors of flaming hue, their dark hair -loose over their shoulders. The scarlet hibiscus blossom woven into -necklaces and entwined in their blue-black locks was both effective and -startling. The men were naked to the lava-lava covering about their -waists, their copper brown skins glistening with cocoanut oil. - -“There’s Kataafa,” Commander Tazewell said to his companions at his -side. “He and Panu-Mafili are rivals to the Kapuan throne, and the -final decision is now in the hands of Judge Lindsay.” The midshipmen -had arrived in Kapua only that morning on the mail steamer from San -Francisco. - -“Kataafa is the high chief who has always rebelled against the king,” -the commander added. “The Herzovinians deported him to one of their -penal islands after his warriors had killed many of their sailors, and -now they are giving him a royal welcome.” - -“Where’s Panu-Mafili?” Phil asked excitedly, after he had feasted his -eyes upon the high chief sitting next the Herzovinian consul. - -Commander Tazewell indicated a small native squatting on the ground in -front of the assemblage. He seemed dwarfed in comparison to the giant -next him. - -“The big one alongside of him is Tuamana,” the commander explained. “He -has always been loyal to the legal king, and is a fine character and a -great fighter. We’ll call upon him by and by.” - -With a flourish of trumpets the ceremony began. The band then struck up -the impressive Herzovinian national air, and all rose to their feet. - -The Herzovinian consul, Mr. Carlson, moved forward after the music had -ceased. He held in his hand a paper which he raised above his head, -praying silence. - -The midshipmen listened eagerly. - -“What language is it?” Phil whispered. He could not recognize a word. -From different quarters of the great crowd could be heard the native -“talking men” repeating the words until they were heard by every native. - -Phil riveted his attention upon the sea of native faces opposite him, -endeavoring to surprise their thoughts, and thus obtain knowledge of -what was being said. - -“I can’t follow him,” Commander Tazewell whispered to Phil, “but I -see it’s making a great impression.” He turned slowly in his chair to -observe the effect upon Judge Lindsay and Mr. Lee, both of whom spoke -Kapuan fluently. - -Judge Lindsay’s under lip was noticeably quivering, while Mr. Lee -ground his teeth in silent rage. - -An exclamation from Phil caused the commander to turn again. The tall -warrior and Panu-Mafili, the other candidate for kingship, had turned -their backs upon the speaker and were talking to their followers behind -them. Almost as one man they obeyed the call, and nearly five hundred -natives slowly and with great dignity marched away, leaving a gaping -hole in the symmetry of the square. - -Mr. Carlson’s flow of native eloquence came to a sudden stop. He -gazed in apparent bewilderment about him. Then from the departing -natives came in melodious rhythm the words, sung over and over -again--“Malea-Toa-Panu-Tupu-e-Kapua”--Malea-Toa Panu is King of Kapua. - -“I’m afraid I can’t stand to hear the rest myself,” Judge Lindsay -declared, unable to Control himself longer. He rose to his feet and -walked away with great dignity. Mr. Lee and the British consul followed. - -“I am going to stick it through,” Commander Sturdy, of the British -war-ship “Hyacinth,” exclaimed as he changed his seat to one next to -Commander Tazewell. “I can’t understand a jolly word, you know, but -it’s as good as a musical opera at home.” - -Chief Kataafa now stood beside Mr. Carlson, while Klinger, the manager -of the Herzovinian firm’s plantations in Kapua, called the “Kapuan -Firm,” called loudly to the natives for silence. - -“The worst is yet to come,” Commander Tazewell laughed. The Herzovinian -sailor company of a hundred strong, their rifles shining brightly in -the sunlight, had smartly taken the position of “present arms.” “But -quiet must be restored before the remainder of this impressive ceremony -will be retailed out to us,” he added impressively. - -Mr. Carlson solemnly placed a wreath of royal yellow about the chief’s -neck. The assemblage suddenly burst forth in uncontrolled savage joy. -Then as if by magic this demonstration was stilled by the music of -a gun. The Herzovinian war-ship was firing a salute in honor of the -returned exiles. - -“Nineteen guns, I suppose,” Commander Sturdy said. Every one was -counting, the natives most of all. The nineteenth gun had fired. All -held their breath. This was the salute usually given a high chief. -There seemed a perceptible pause and then another crash reverberated -across the water, and yet another. - -“A royal salute,” all gasped. Again pandemonium broke loose among the -Kataafa adherents. Herzovinia had acknowledged Kataafa as king of Kapua. - -Commander Tazewell’s face suddenly dropped its joviality. The British -captain said things under his breath, while the American and English -officers gazed at each other, utterly speechless with surprise. - -“Kataafa Tupu-e-Kapua[1]--ah,” the song burst forth, drowning out all -other sounds. - -The stands were quickly emptied. The American and English officers -joined the resident ladies of their nationality and escorted them in -angry silence away from the scene. - -Judge Lindsay and Mr. Lee were encountered only a few hundred yards -away. Mr. Lee called Commander Tazewell to his side. - -“We are waiting to hear from Mr. Carlson what is the meaning of this -treachery,” he exclaimed. “Judge Lindsay goes so far as to believe that -now a war over the title of king of Kapua cannot be averted. It is -outrageous.” - -Phil and Sydney gazed with interest at the daughters of the American -consul, Mr. Lee, whom they had not met, and were greatly disappointed -when they heard him direct them to return home immediately. The -midshipmen remained behind with their captain. - -The Herzovinian consul, accompanied by Klinger and a stranger and -followed by several naval officers, soon appeared. Their faces were -wreathed in smiles and their shoulders were decorated with circlets of -flowers placed there by the jubilant Kataafa adherents. - -Judge Lindsay placed himself squarely in their path. His face was pale, -and he held his cane clutched firmly in his hand. - -“Mr. Carlson,” he exclaimed in a clear vibrant voice, “I desire you -to state to me, as chief justice of Kapua, publicly and at once, your -authority in making such a speech, acknowledging for Herzovinia the -claim of Kataafa to be king of Kapua. Further, I desire to hear the -authority for the salute of twenty-one guns, a salute given only to a -king. As chief justice of these islands I represent the Herzovinian law -as well as the law of England and America. Do I understand, sir, that -you have set aside law, the law of the treaty between the three great -nations, and have rendered a decision in favor of Kataafa, even while I -am still deliberating upon the justice of these two claimant chiefs for -the title of king?” - -Mr. Cartoon’s face was a study. He looked appealingly to the stranger -beside him as if for support. Phil was astonished to note the evident -gleam of triumph in the stranger’s eyes. The lad regarded him closely. -He was tall and finely built; his face was pale and highly intellectual -in appearance. He appeared to be a man of great force of character. - -“My dear judge,” Mr. Carlson floundered hopelessly. “Come with us to -the consulate. This is really not the place for dispute.” - -They had been surrounded by inquisitive natives of all sizes, who are -quick to scent an altercation, and even though not understanding the -words, like all nature’s children, can read the language of the eye, -the face and the hand. - -“Don’t dear me,” the judge exclaimed, even more angrily. “Your -treachery was public; my condemnation of it shall be public also.” - -Mr. Carlson’s face streamed with perspiration. He was a big man and -inclined to be fat. His gorgeous uniform fitted like a glove. Under a -torrid sun he was a picture of woe. - -The stranger whispered in the consul’s ear. Phil noted that the red -face suddenly cleared. - -“You have misunderstood, judge,” Mr. Carlson began, not at all certain -of his ground, but his voice gained strength as he continued. “I did -not say he was Tupu[2] of Kapua. That you must decide. I only hailed -Kataafa as Tupu. Being the choice of so many villages makes him Tupu. -That was my meaning. Kataafa and Panu-Mafili are both Tupu, but -neither is yet Tupu-e-Kapua.” Mr. Carlson was now smiling benignly upon -the judge. - -Judge Lindsay made a sign of disgust. - -“Do you take me for a babe in arms?” he exploded. “How dare you insult -my intelligence by such an absolute and unnecessary falsehood! Whether -you know what you read or not, I do know. I heard and understood. You -did not mince matters there.” He drew himself up haughtily and glared -defiantly and for the first time at the stranger and Klinger. - -“The Kapuan language, to one who knows it, is not difficult. I advise -you, Mr. Carlson, hereafter to stick to a language you know, otherwise -your able co-conspirators will be putting embarrassing words into your -innocent mouth.” - -A ripple of suppressed merriment rose unrebuked at the judge’s sally. -Mr. Carlson seemed too dazed and worried to make any reply. - -The judge bowed ceremoniously, linking his arm in that of Mr. Lee, and -walked away. - - - - -CHAPTER II - -DISCORD AMONG THE WHITES - - -The day after the ceremony of welcome to Kataafa, Phil and Sydney again -accompanied their captain on shore. Commander Tazewell took a lively -interest in everything that was going on and was delighted to have such -enthusiastic young supporters. - -“You’ll find,” he said after they had landed and sent the boat away, -“that the natives of both factions are equally friendly to us. That is -a good sign and I hope it will continue.” - -The highroad of Ukula was filled with half-naked muscular men and -lithe, graceful, dark-eyed women. Every native exhaled the acrid odor -of cocoanut oil. The men’s long hair was plastered white with lime and -tied on top in the form of a topknot. - -“The lime bleaches the hair red, you know,” Commander Tazewell -explained, noting the lads’ curiosity at this peculiar custom. “The -oil is to prevent them from catching cold. They go into the water, you -see, any hour of the day, and when they come out they are as dry as -ducks.” - -The officers had landed at Kulinuu, the traditional residence of the -Malea-Toa family, from which many kings had been chosen and to which -Panu-Mafili belonged. On every hand they encountered good-natured -smiling natives. “Talofa, Alii”[3] was on every lip. - -“Ten thousand of these fellows are encamped in the vicinity of Ukula -waiting to see who the chief justice makes their king,” the commander -said. “You see,” he added, “strange as it may seem to us, two chiefs -may rightfully be elected. Election depends upon quality of votes -rather than upon quantity. So according to traditional Kapuan custom -when two kings are elected, they decide it by having a big battle. That -is the normal way, but we have persuaded the natives that arbitration -is more civilized. Now the chief justice decides and the three nations -support that decision.” - -“It looks rather as though Herzovinia would support the judge only -in case he decides for Kataafa,” Sydney said questioningly. “If that -country refuses to back up the judge what will happen?” - -Commander Tazewell was thoughtful for half a minute. - -“According to the treaty all are required to agree,” he answered. -“There is no choice. Once the decision is made that creates a king, all -who oppose him are rebels. That is the law, and these foreign war-ships -are here to uphold Judge Lindsay’s decision, right or wrong.” - -As the three pedestrians, dressed in their white duck uniforms, white -helmets protecting their heads from the tropical sun, reached the hard -coral road leading along the shore of the bay, the panorama of the -harbor opened and delighted the eyes of the young men. - -The white coral reef, lying beneath scarcely half a fathom of water, -was peopled by natives gathering shell-fish to feed the greater influx -of population. On the bosom of the dark green water, beyond the inner -reef, and almost encircled by spurs of a second ledge of coral, lay -anchored the war-ships of three great nations. In the foreground, -lying on their sides, two twisted red-stained hulls, the bleaching -bones of once proud men-of-war, told of the sport of giant waves that -had hurled them a hundred yards along the inner reef and drowned -many of their crews. This manifestation of the power of a tropical -hurricane, that might come almost unheralded out of the watery waste, -prevented any relaxation of vigilance. At all times the war-ships were -kept ready to seek safety at sea, clear of the treacherous coral reefs. -To be caught at anchor in the harbor of Ukula when a hurricane broke -could mean only another red-stained wreck upon the reef. - -The road soon left the water’s edge. Now it ran several hundred yards -inland through groves of cocoanut, banana and breadfruit trees. -Fringing the road were many spider-like, grass-thatched native houses, -similar to those they had seen among the groves at Kulinuu. Seated on -mats under these shelters were numerous natives, and the Americans -as they progressed received frequent cordial invitation to stop and -refresh themselves from the very hospitable islanders. Commander -Tazewell, during his stay in Kapua, had acquired some facility in -the language, which greatly delighted the childlike natives, and -they lost no opportunity to engage him to join their meetings, in -order that they might listen to their own language from the lips of a -“papalangi”[4] chief. But apparently the commander did not intend to -stop. Both midshipmen now eyed longingly the cool interior of a large -and pretentious house which they were approaching. From the entrance -a stately warrior beckoned them to come and partake of the milk of a -cocoanut. - -[Illustration: MAP OF UKULA] - -Commander Tazewell waved a solemn acknowledgment. “That’s Tuamana, -the chief of Ukula,” he said to his companions. “We’ll stop for just -a minute. It was he,” the commander added as they approached the -delighted chief, “who saved so many lives during the hurricane when -those two war-ships were thrown up bodily on the reef, and several -others were wrecked at their moorings.” - -Tuamana grasped each by the hand in turn and then led them to mats -laid upon the pebbly floor. He clapped his hands, and almost at once -from behind the dividing curtain of “Tapa”[5] cloth, two native girls -glided, gracefully and with outstretched hands, to the side of the -“papalangis.” Seating themselves the girls began industriously fanning -the heated officers. Phil soon appreciated the reason for this delicate -attention; swarms of flies hovered about them, to fight which alone -would soon exhaust one’s patience. - -Commander Tazewell and Chief Tuamana engaged in quiet conversation in -Kapuan while the chief’s talking man, a native educated at one of the -mission schools, came frequently to their aid when the commander’s -limited native vocabulary gave evidence of being inadequate. - -Phil and Sydney were thus left free to enjoy the novelty of their -surroundings. - -The two young girls fanned and giggled in turns until Phil, unused to -such delicate attention from the opposite sex, insisted upon taking the -cleverly wrought banana leaf fan, and much to the amusement of the two -girls began fanning himself and the girl too. After a few moments this -young lady arose, bowed and disappeared behind the screen convulsed -with laughter. - -“You’ve offended her,” insisted Sydney. “Haven’t you learned yet to -give women their own way?” - -But Phil’s gallantry was to receive its reward. A third graceful Kapuan -girl, her high caste face beaming upon them, glided through the tapa -screen. Bowing low before Commander Tazewell, she took the vacant place -at Phil’s side. - -Commander Tazewell made a jesting remark in Kapuan, which caused every -one to laugh except the two midshipmen. - -“This is Tuamana’s daughter Avao,” the commander said. “I told her -she’d have a difficult time making a choice between my two handsome -aides; but I see she has made up her mind already.” - -Avao had taken the fan from Phil’s hand and was now efficiently fanning -him. - -A half hour later as they were standing, bidding good-bye to their -hosts, Commander Tazewell announced to Phil that the chief’s daughter -had paid him a signal honor. - -“She wants you to be her felinge,”[6] he said, his grave eyes -sparkling. “It’s a Tapau’s[7] privilege to choose. Your obligation is -to present her with soap, tooth powder, in fact, anything she fancies -that you can get in the ship’s store. For this you are privileged to -drink as many cocoanuts and eat as much fruit as you desire at her -father’s house. She will even send you presents of fruit, tapa and -fans. If I were Mr. Monroe, I’d envy you your luck, for Avao is the -belle of Ukula.” - -Avao blushed under her bronze and playfully struck the commander with -her fan. - -“Leonga Alii!”[8] she exclaimed abashed. - -“She understands and speaks English as well as I do,” he said, laughing -at the girl’s sudden shyness. “Once I thought she’d make me her -felinge, but I suppose youth takes rank.” - -Once more on the road Commander Tazewell became again serious. - -“That affair yesterday is taking on a darker aspect,” he confided. -“Tuamana says that every one knows among the natives that if Judge -Lindsay decides for Panu-Mafili then Kataafa has been persuaded by the -Herzovinians to make war. - -“Tuamana, of course,” he added, “is a loyal man. He is on Panu’s side, -but will be loyal to whom Judge Lindsay decides is really the king.” - -In front of the big wooden store in the Matafeli district of the town, -Commander Tazewell stopped. Many natives were gathered there. The porch -was crowded, while within the store there seemed to be only standing -room. - -“What mischief is going on here?” he exclaimed, a perplexed frown on -his face. - -Suddenly Klinger and the stranger of yesterday darkened the doorway. -The stranger gazed coldly upon the Americans but gave no sign of -recognition. He and Klinger continued to talk in their guttural -Herzovinian tongues. - -Phil suddenly observed that the air of friendliness they had noted -earlier was now lacking. The natives no longer greeted them. Instead in -the native eye was a sheepish, sullen look. - -“That was Count Rosen,” Commander Tazewell said as they again moved -onward. “Klinger, of course, is active and sides with Kataafa. -Klinger’s wife is a native, you know, a close relative of the high -chief. I suppose he’d like to have royalty in the family.” - -“The store looked like a recruiting station,” Phil suggested. - -Commander Tazewell nodded gravely. “It may be,” he replied. - -The Matautu section of Ukula, set aside for the official residences of -the consuls of England and the United States, was being approached. - -At the gate of the American consulate, Mr. Lee hailed them. The consul -was naturally a peace loving man, and the fact that he had with him in -Kapua his two daughters was an added argument for peace. - -“Come in, commander,” he called from his doorway. - -They turned in through the gateway. - -“All manner of war rumors,” Mr. Lee exclaimed, as he shook hands, “are -going the rounds. The latest is that a paper has been found written -by Herzovinian statesmen some years ago declaring their country would -never, never permit Kataafa to be king. The Kapuans believe that this -will make Judge Lindsay decide for Panu-Mafili. Until that disgraceful -affair of yesterday, and the rumor of this paper, we all thought that -whatever the decision the three consuls would unite to prevent war. -Panu-Mafili has said openly he and his followers would abide by the -decision. Kataafa appeared willing, but has as yet made no statement. - -“The situation is alarming, commander,” Mr. Lee added gravely, “and I -for one am at a loss what should be done.” - -“Arrest the white men who are inciting Kataafa to revolt in the event -of an adverse decision and ship them from Kapua; that’s my remedy,” -Commander Tazewell answered promptly. - -“Count Rosen and Klinger,” the consul exclaimed. “Impossible!” - -Commander Tazewell shrugged his shoulders. - -“It’s the one way to prevent war,” he said. - -“The Herzovinian consul, after agreeing to stand with us and prevent -a war, has now assumed a mysterious air of importance and we can get -nothing definite from him,” Mr. Lee complained bitterly. “If my advice -had only been followed and Kataafa kept away until after a new king had -been crowned, this perplexing state could not have existed.” - -Commander Tazewell was thoughtful for several minutes. - -“Mr. Lee,” he said gravely, “I believe that bringing Kataafa back at -this time was a Herzovinian plan. The chief has been in exile for five -years and in a Herzovinian colony, and I hear was treated as a prince -instead of a prisoner. Although his warriors killed Herzovinian sailors -in the last revolt, now he favors that nation. Once he is king of Kapua -he will advance all Herzovinian interests. They may hope even for -annexation, a dream long cherished by Klinger and his countrymen. - -“Yes, if the judge decides against Kataafa there will be war,” he -concluded solemnly. - -Phil and Sydney listened eagerly. Though these native affairs were -not easy to understand, yet they could not interrupt and ask for -explanations. - -At this time there came an interruption in the serious talk between -Commander Tazewell and Mr. Lee. It was the arrival of the two young -ladies. They had been out in the “bush,” as the country back of the sea -beach is called in Kapua. They appeared, their young faces glowing with -health from their recent exercise and their arms full of the scarlet -“pandanus” blossoms. - -Margaret, the older girl, was a woman in spite of her nineteen years. -She greeted the newcomers to Kapua with a grace that won the midshipmen -at once. Alice, two years her junior, caught the boyish fancy of the -lads instantly. She seemed to carry with her the free air of the woods, -and exhaled its freshness. She had scarcely a trace of the reserve in -manner of her older sister. Her greeting was spontaneously frank and -unabashed. - -While Margaret presided at the tea table, around which Commander -Tazewell and the consul gathered, Alice impressed the willing -midshipmen into her service, and with their arms loaded with the -pandanus flowers, led them to the dining-room. Here she placed the -brilliant blossoms into numerous vases, giving to the room with its -paucity of furniture a gala aspect. - -“Do you care for tea?” she said questioningly, implying clearly a -negative answer, which both lads were quick to catch. - -“Never take it,” Phil replied quickly. “Do you, Syd?” - -Sydney smiled and shook his head. - -“Because if you don’t, while the others are drinking it, we can climb -Mission Hill back of the town and enjoy the view of the harbor. It’s -not far,” she added glancing at the spotless white uniform of the young -officers. - -She led them at a rapid pace across the garden and by a narrow path -into a thickly wooded copse. The path was apparently one not frequently -used and was choked with creepers and underbrushes. After a score -of yards the path led at a steep angle up the wooded side of one of -the low surrounding hills, which at Matautu descended almost to the -harbor’s edge. Here the shore is rocky and dangerous. - -Alice climbed with the ease of a wood sprite, while the midshipmen -lumbered after her in their endeavor to keep pace. - -“Here we are,” she cried joyfully as she sprang up the last few feet of -incline and seated herself in the fork of a small mulberry tree. - -Out of breath, their white trousers and white canvas shoes stained -with the juice of entangling vines, and with perspiration streaming in -little rivulets down their crimson faces, the two young men looked with -amazement at their slim pace-maker; she was not even out of breath. - -“Isn’t it worth coming for?” she exclaimed, perfect enjoyment in -her girlish voice. “See, the town and the harbor and all the ships -lie at our feet; and everything looks so very near;” then she added -whimsically, “I sometimes pretend I am queen and order everything and -every one about--no one else ever comes here,” she explained quickly. -“My sister Margaret came once, but never came again.” - -“It’s not easy to get here,” Sydney said, panting slightly, “but it -would more than be worth the trouble if by coming one could really -know the feeling of being a king or a queen. I haven’t sufficient -imagination. What should you do if you were queen?” he asked of Alice. - -She drew her brows down thoughtfully. - -“I don’t know all that I should do,” she replied earnestly, “but the -very first thing would be to send away every papalangi.” - -“The war-ships too?” Phil inquired. “I call that hospitable!” - -“I might keep you,” indicating both lads by a wave of her free hand, -“as leaders for my army, but every one else would be sent away and -leave these children of nature free to live their lives as God intended -they should.” A deep conviction in the girl’s voice was not lost upon -the midshipmen. - -“Suppose you tell us of Kapua,” Phil said gently, after a short silence. - -“Yes, do,” Sydney urged eagerly. - -“Tell you of Kapua Uma,”[9] Alice said wistfully. “I have lived here -now three years, and I feel as if the people were my people. They are -gentle, generous and lovable, except when they are excited by the -papalangi. The white men have brought only trouble and sorrow to the -islands. No Kapuan has ever broken his word, except when the white men -have betrayed him. In all their wars they have been generous to their -foes. They never harm women and children. The white men incite war, but -are free from injury, except when they attack the Kapuans first. - -“Once all the rich land near the sea belonged to Kapua. Now white -men have stolen it away by fraud and deceit.” Alice’s eyes flashed -indignantly, while her hearers were thrilled by the fervor in her -young voice. “The foreign firm of which Klinger is manager, called the -‘Kapuan Firm,’ owned by Herzovinian capital, is no ordinary company -of South Sea traders,” she added. “It is the feet of the Herzovinian -Empire, holding the door of annexation open. The firm’s business grows -greater every year. They import black labor from the Solomon Islands -and hold them to work as slaves. The treaty gives the Kapuans the right -to choose their king, but the firm will sanction no king who will not -first agree to further the interests of the Kapuan firm. - -“Kataafa once fought against the firm and won, but he was exiled by -the Herzovinian government. Now a majority of people again wish him -for king, and this time the firm is not only willing but anxious that -he should be made king. England and America represented in Kapua see -in this a bid for annexation. Judge Lindsay will soon decide between -Kataafa and Panu-Mafili. Panu has given his word he will not fight. -Kataafa signed a sworn agreement in order to obtain the consent of the -three Powers to his return from exile, that he would never again take -up arms.” - -Alice stopped breathless. “There you have the full history of Kapua in -a nutshell,” she added laughingly as she slipped down from her seat. - -“Poor Panu-Mafili is only a boy. His father, you know, was the late -king Malea-Toa or ‘Laupepe,’ a ‘sheet of paper,’ as the natives called -him, because he was intellectual. Panu begged to be allowed to go away -and study,” she said, “but our great governments need him as a big -piece in the political chess game.” - -“More aptly a pawn,” Phil corrected. - -Alice was gazing wistfully seaward. - -“Out there,” she said after a moment’s silence, “is a sail. It’s -probably the ‘Talofa,’ a schooner from the Fiji. The natives say -‘Bully’ Scott and the ‘Talofa’ scent out wars in the South Seas and -arrive just in time to sell a shipload of rifles.” - -The midshipmen saw the tops of a “sail” far out on the horizon. - -“If Kataafa needs guns to defy the chief justice, there they are,” she -added. - -“Isn’t it against the law to sell guns to the natives?” Sydney asked. - -Alice regarded him with high disdain. - -“‘Bully’ Scott knows no law nor nationality,” she replied. “To give -your nationality in Kapua is a disadvantage, because then your consul -interferes with your business. When you’re trading in ‘blacks’ and -guns, it’s best to deprive yourself of the luxury of a country. ‘Bully’ -Scott is from the world.” - -“How do you know that is the ‘Talofa’?” Phil asked incredulously, but -all the same greatly interested. - -“I don’t know,” she answered gayly as she led the way toward home; “but -the ‘Talofa’ is a schooner, and the natives believe she will come. And -that’s a schooner.” - -Her logic was not convincing to the midshipmen, but then they had not -lived three years in Kapua. Schooners were not frequent visitors at -Ukula. - - - - -CHAPTER III - -PLOTTING FOR POWER - - -The Herzovinian consul sat upon his wide verandah gazing out upon the -quiet bay of Ukula. His usually serene face wore a troubled look. Count -Rosen paced the porch restlessly. His well-knit figure was becomingly -clad in a military khaki riding suit, and he held a heavy rhinoceros -hide whip in his hand. Consul Carlson was over fifty. Rosen was not -over thirty, and appeared even younger. - -Count Rosen was talking while Mr. Carlson listened with an unusual air -of deference. - -“When Kataafa was hurried here from Malut, the island of his exile, our -foreign office expected you to have paved the way to make him king.” -The speaker struck a picturesque stand in front of the consul’s chair. -“Instead you have been fraternizing with these other consuls. The chief -justice has you under his thumb. Is that the way to bring on a crisis?” - -The Herzovinian consul swallowed a lump in his throat. It was hard to -be taken to task by such a young man. - -“Count Rosen,” he answered, a sudden spark of resentment coming into -his small eyes, “if I have displeased the foreign office, I can resign.” - -“Resign,” the count exclaimed disgustedly. “Why talk of resigning with -such an opportunity before you? Have you no ambition? Will you permit -Herzovinia to be robbed of what naturally belongs to her? We have -worked long and spilled Herzovinian blood in order to acquire these -beautiful rich islands. And with the end in sight will you resign?” - -Mr. Carlson roused himself from his dejection. - -“I agreed with the other consuls to try to prevent a war. Cannot we -succeed without bloodshed? I don’t believe the foreign office really -wishes that.” - -Count Rosen’s eyes flashed. - -“What are these puny wars to our statesmen?” he asked. “Has anything -worth while ever been attained without the shedding of blood? But,” he -added, “you were about to tell me of some important news.” - -“I have reliable information that a letter has been received by Judge -Lindsay, written some years ago by our government, which demands that -Kataafa shall never be king,” Mr. Carlson said earnestly. “I knew of -the letter, but believed it was withdrawn when England and America -refused to agree.” - -“It was never withdrawn,” Count Rosen replied. “The chief justice then -will decide for this foolish boy Panu-Mafili. That decision must bring -on a war.” - -Mr. Carlson looked surprised, his round red face a picture of timid -anxiety. “Kataafa will break his oath?” he questioned aghast. - -“Of course, and now for the political side of this issue,” the count -nodded and continued. “Under the treaty the three consuls must act in -concert to uphold the decisions of the chief justice. Will you, knowing -the aim of your government and loving the natives as your friends, give -your support to such a wicked decision? Will you call for your sailors -and force upon these honest, childlike natives a king not of their -choosing?” - -Mr. Carlson glanced up appealingly. “Count,” he exclaimed, “what would -you do if you were in my place?” - -Count Rosen smiled enigmatically. “Mr. Carlson,” he replied, “I have -no credentials. I have been sent by our foreign office to study the -situation in the South Seas. At Fiji I received a letter to go to -Ukula. I am here. Advice without responsibility is not good. You must -decide for yourself, for you alone are responsible for your acts to -our government. I can, however, show you,” he added earnestly, “how -the situation will develop if you continue to act in harmony with the -other consuls in upholding the decision, if it is against Kataafa. The -natives will arm and fight. The Kataafa warriors are in vastly superior -numbers and will soon win a victory. The sailors of three nations -will be landed to fight the victorious side. With their superior guns -and training many innocent natives must be killed. It would then be a -general war, the whites against the natives.” - -“And if I refuse to stand with the others?” the consul asked earnestly. - -“That will greatly simplify everything,” the count replied. “The -Kataafa warriors would declare him king. The Panu natives in such -great inferiority of numbers cannot resist except with the aid of the -sailors, and that could not be given as long as you refuse to join. -The treaty distinctly stipulates that action may be taken unanimously. -There would be no war. The next mail from home would bring the recall -of this partial judge. Kataafa would remain king, and then he must soon -seek annexation to our Herzovinia. I hope to see our flag hoisted over -the Kapuan Islands. And of course,” he added, “you will get all the -credit. The order of the Black Eagle will be yours.” - -The consul’s face was now fairly beaming upon this kind prophet. - -“My mind is made up,” he said. “I shall refuse to be used by those who -have only selfish aims. I shall write and refuse to agree with the -other consuls.” - -Count Rosen smiled triumphantly as he rode his pony along the main road -of Ukula. - -“Carlson has been here too long,” he said to himself. “He thinks -there’s nothing beyond his narrow horizon. His lonesome life has made -him timid; he needed stirring to life. Herzovinia’s aims must be kept -always before us. Our statesmen decided years ago to own these islands. -Our money is invested here and they are a link in our colonial chain. A -war! a little bloodshed! What does it matter?” - -At the Kapuan firm’s store the count dismounted, giving his pony in -care of a native. - -Klinger, the manager, met him at the door-step. No word was spoken -until they reached the office in the rear of the store and the door -closed behind them. - -“I see in your face you are successful,” Klinger said as the count took -the proffered chair. - -“Everything so far has been wonderful,” the count exclaimed. “Judge -Lindsay will give the decision to Panu, Kataafa will revolt, and -Carlson will refuse to do anything. The hands of our friends the enemy -are tied.” - -“I too have news,” Klinger said. “Kataafa has bought all the guns -coming in the ‘Talofa.’ Also he has answered Judge Lindsay’s letter, -that he cannot agree to give his word to remain peaceful if the -decision is against him, as he considers the right to be king is his, -and he has already been acknowledged king by one power. What do you -think of that?” he asked delightedly. - -“I saw Kataafa to-day and he says he is anxious for annexation to -Herzovinia,” Klinger continued. “The Americans, you know, have acquired -title to land in the harbor of Tua-Tua on the island of Kulila. That -must be broken up.” - -The count nodded. “Go ahead, you have a free rein. And now what about -the whereabouts of our friend Captain ‘Bully’ Scott?” - -“I am looking for him daily,” Klinger replied. “He is bringing enough -guns to arm every Kataafa warrior. All day long I have been getting -receipts from the natives for gun to be delivered.” - -“Always an eye for business,” the count exclaimed in half jesting -disgust. “You merchants own these poor natives body and soul.” - -[Illustration: THREE AMERICAN OFFICERS WERE STANDING IN THE ROAD] - -“What would you have us do?” Klinger answered defensively. “I have -spent many thousands of dollars upon these rifles. I am taking great -risks in getting them here, for if either of the war-ships seize them -they will be confiscated under the treaty, and I have no redress. And, -count,” he added, “you know it is all for our country.” - -Count Rosen nodded his head, but his steel gray eyes looked squarely -into those of the manager of the Kapuan firm until the latter’s fell -in quick embarrassment. The count knew that the man’s natural cupidity -was a large measure of the driving force stimulating his patriotic -enthusiasm. - -“There’s nothing to do but wait,” the count said as they reached the -door of the store. - -Three American officers were standing in the road at the front. - -“The American commander will have to be handled carefully,” the -count said in a low voice to Klinger, as he turned his back upon the -officers. “He’s a fine type; I can see it in his face. He’d make a -stanch friend, but a difficult enemy.” This last to himself. Sentiment -was wasted upon the selfish manager of a grasping firm. - -“I must contrive to know him,” the count added aloud. - -The American officers had now continued along the road. - -“Don’t be too precipitate,” the count cautioned as he whistled to the -native boy, holding his pony’s bridle. - -The count mounted his pony, walking it slowly down the road. At the -Tivoli Hotel he stopped and dismounted. Within a half hour he walked -from the hotel, carefully dressed in a spotless white linen suit and -helmet. He turned his steps toward Matautu. - -He turned in at the American consulate gate, and walked with an air of -high bred assurance up the steps of the porch. - -Mr. Lee arose to receive him, a frank smile of cordiality upon his face. - -“Count Felix Rosen.” The visitor pronounced his name slowly; there was -the smallest of accents. “I have come to pay my respects,” he said -quietly. “We tourists often forget our social duties.” - -“It is I who should apologize, Count Rosen,” Mr. Lee exclaimed, -introducing the visitor to his daughter and Commander Tazewell. “You -have been in Ukula for several days, and I should have called upon you -and bid you welcome to our little island.” - -“Truly, sir, I should not expect you to take so much trouble,” the -count returned suavely. “I am but a globe-trotter, as you say in -America. I have no aim, no business. I go where I may be amused.” - -The count accepted the cup of tea offered him by Miss Lee and sipped it -meditatively. He felt the awkward silence and hastened to relieve it. - -“My time here is likely to be so short,” he added, “that I hope if -there must be war among the natives they will wait until after I can -explore the islands. In my few days I have ridden miles and have been -everywhere charmed with the natural beauty of the country and the -charming hospitality of the natives.” - -“We also, count, are hoping that there will be no war,” Mr. Lee -replied. “And if your consul will stand with the British consul and -myself it can be averted.” - -“So!” the count exclaimed surprisedly. “Does Mr. Carlson then desire -a war? Sometimes I lose all patience with my stubborn countryman. It -is very strange,” he added. “I lunched with him to-day and he seemed -aggrieved that you and the British consul would not support him to -prevent a war.” - -Commander Tazewell had been carefully studying the speaker’s face. -He read there only disinterested amusement over the situation. What -business could this cultured Herzovinian have with Klinger? He decided -to endeavor to find out. - -“Most of the disturbances among the natives,” Commander Tazewell said -quietly, “are brought about by the merchants. Arms, you know, Count -Rosen, are merchandise upon which an enormous profit is realized. -A war, though, is required to create a market. I believe that Mr. -Klinger could allay your uneasiness over the possibility of a war more -certainly than can either of the consuls.” - -The count raised his eyes slowly to the speaker’s face. Their eyes met -and for a moment each gauged the other. The count shifted his gaze -first; a faint suspicion of a flush had come under his tanned cheeks. - -“Klinger has been good enough to arrange some trips for me into the -interior of the island,” the count explained quickly. “I was arranging -details with him for a trip to the Papasea,[10] the sliding rock, when -you passed his store.” A smile of delight spread over his handsome face -as he suddenly asked: “Can’t we make up a party for that trip? I should -be charmed to play host. But,” he added, “I suppose with you it is an -old story.” - -Mr. Lee declined for himself. The uncertainty of the situation demanded -his continuous presence in Ukula. - -After some discussion it was arranged that the party start the next -morning. Alice and the midshipmen returned in time to be included, -together with Commander Tazewell and Miss Lee. - -“I cannot express to you the honor you have done me in accepting my -invitation,” the count exclaimed, as he bade good-bye. “This morning I -was a lonesome stranger, and now I am rich in friends.” - -“Who is he?” Commander Tazewell asked the consul as his straight figure -passed out of sight down the road. - -Mr. Lee shook his head. - -“Some well connected Herzovinian of the smaller nobility, I suppose,” -he replied. “His consul called upon him almost at once after he arrived -on the last steamer from the South. A title carries a great deal of -dignity with it.” - -“He is certainly very fine looking,” Miss Lee said admiringly. - -“And knows how to talk,” Phil added. - -“I believe he is a past master in the art of talk,” Alice said -pointedly. “And the worst of it is we know what he says and not what he -means.” - -All laughed at the girl’s quaint mode of expression. - -“Call me silly and a rebel all you please,” she added turning upon her -sister, who at once denied even the thought of any such accusation, -“but I am and always will be suspicious of a Herzovinian in Kapua. -Anywhere else he may be honest and mean what he says, but here, no!” -She shook her head vigorously. - -While the two midshipmen with Commander Tazewell were returning in the -captain’s gig to the “Sitka,” Phil spoke of the sailing vessel they -had seen from Alice’s “lookout.” - -“Probably it isn’t Captain Scott’s ‘Talofa,’” he added deprecatingly. -“It was too far away to see anything but the tops of her sails.” - -Commander Tazewell listened earnestly. - -“‘Bully’ Scott is usually on hand where there is a chance for his -nefarious trade in guns,” he replied. “Miss Alice Lee may have no real -grounds for her belief that it is the ‘Talofa,’ but that young girl -is more than usually clever for one of her age, and her father tells -me she is worshiped by the native women, to whom she is a veritable -administering angel. Tuamana’s daughter, Avao, is her particular -friend. You know,” he added, “in Kapua, the women are the tale bearers; -no bit of interesting news escapes them.” - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -CAPTAIN “BULLY” SCOTT AND HIS MATE - - -Captain “Bully” Scott sat comfortably on the combing of the after deck -house and gazed toward the high mountain ranges of the islands of -Kapua. The land had been in sight all day, but the fitful breeze was -hardly enough to hold the “Talofa’s” great expanse of canvas out taut -against the sheets. Yet even the light breeze drove the schooner faster -than the captain wished to travel. - -“Bring her up another point,” he directed, in a well modulated, almost -cultivated voice. - -The helmsman, a Fiji Islander, a strapping bronze skinned native, naked -except for the loin cloth of tapa, eased down his helm until the great -sails flapped idly. - -“Mr. Stump,” the captain called down the hatch. - -A middle-sized, wizened man stuck his head up above the deck in answer. - -“Mr. Stump, I’ll thank you to invite our passengers down to their -staterooms and put the hatch cover on and lock it,” Captain Scott said -politely. “It’ll be dark in another half hour, and then we’ll ‘bear up’ -and run in to close with the land.” - -Benjamin Stump nodded his head in reply and turned on his heel to go -forward. This was a daily occurrence. Captain Scott had learned to -secure his human cargo at night. A mutiny that came near ending fatally -to him had taught him this lesson. - -“Oh, Stump!” Captain Scott raised his voice to be heard above the -lapping of the water and the noise of shaking canvas. “I hope our -disagreement at Suva[11] is all forgotten by now. You can’t afford -to fall out with me, Stump,” he added menacingly after the man had -returned and lolled against the shrouds of the main rigging. “There’s -that little affair at the Ellice Islands and the deal in Tahiti; and -besides, Stump, you know that black boy on our last manifest didn’t -really fall overboard.” - -Stump’s knees shook imperceptibly while his thin claw-like fingers -worked convulsively. His uncouth mind had not forgotten the matter. He -had remembered it, lived with the remembrance every day of the thirty -since leaving the Fijis; and had nursed his desire for revenge against -his captain and benefactor. - -“Captain Scott, you hadn’t any call to do what you did,” he said -doggedly. “Those people were my friends, and righteous people too. They -believed the story I told ’em. They gave me human sympathy, and I was -downright sorry I wasn’t what I said I was. I was afeared to tell them -the truth. They took me to prayer-meetings and prayed for my soul and -one of the young ladies begged me to go home to my old parents and be -forgiven.” - -Captain Scott suddenly leaned back in his seat and roared with -uncontrolled laughter. - -“You impious rascal!” he exclaimed. “Do you suppose I could permit -you to impose upon my friends with any such tales? I picked you up -in Shanghai, do you remember? You either had to go with me or to the -consular jail for being too light fingered with other people’s money. -You told me your parents were dead; and besides, that young lady was -getting too sorry for you for both her good and yours.” - -Stump’s weasel eyes flashed angrily. - -“You might have split on me differently,” he said. “That girl’s -accusing eyes hurt me every time I think of it.” - -Captain Scott stifled his merriment. - -“I’m really sorry, Stump,” he said. “You and I have been together a -long time, and sometimes maybe I don’t understand you as I should. -Sentiment is new to you. This trip is going to give us a rich haul, -and I’m going to give you an extra hundred dollars just to square your -injured vanity.” - -Captain Scott watched the lean figure as it ambled forward. He saw -him herd together the score of black Solomon Islanders, brought to -sell into slavery on the plantations of the Kapuan firm. After all had -descended into the dark stuffy forehold, Stump, with the help of a -couple of the Fiji crew, put on the hatch cover and locked it. The only -air for the prisoners was admitted through two small ventilators in the -deck. - -“Stump’s acting queerly this trip,” Captain Scott said thoughtfully to -himself. “Appears to be considering jumping the game. It won’t do,” he -exclaimed. “He knows too much about yours truly. Nice gratitude, I call -it, after I saved him from a Chinese prison.” - -Stump walked aimlessly aft and leaned indolently against the rail. His -face wore a frown. - -“What in blazes is the matter with you, anyway?” Captain Scott -exclaimed. “Your face has been as long this trip as a Fiji widow’s. You -know me well enough by this time to understand that sort of grump don’t -go with me. If you don’t cultivate a little more pleasantry, I’ll have -to dispense with your company, no matter how necessary it has been.” - -Stump gained a measure of confidence in the knowledge of war-ships in -the harbor of Ukula, not over twelve miles distant. The very tops of -their lofty spars could indistinctly be seen against the dark green -background of the island. - -“I have been considering cutting out this here kind of life,” he -replied. “That girl in Suva made me hanker after going back to my own -folks. I haven’t heard of them for nearly ten years.” - -A sinister look came into Captain Scott’s cold gray eyes. Stump was -not only a useful man, but he shared too many of the schooner’s dark -secrets. A way must be found to shake these sentimental longings loose -from Stump’s mind. - -“Some day,” he returned suavely, “we’ll make a trip with the ‘Talofa’ -up to ‘Frisco’ and turn over a new page in our life. You are just down -on your luck now, Stump,” he added kindly. “That will all pass away -when you get ashore among your old cronies on the beach at Ukula.” - -In Stump’s mind a battle was being waged. He was not naturally a bad -man, but was weak in character. He had run away from home when he was -only a lad, and the years he had spent upon the sea had only brought -him lower in the human scale. Hard knocks and brutality had been -showered upon him. He was by nature shiftless and lazy. No one had ever -taken the trouble to show him the error of his ways. Captain Scott had -used him because he could bend him to his will. The many unlawful acts -he had committed were at the instigation of his benefactor. Stump was -not a coward. He had proved his fearlessness during many fights with -the savages of the black islands to the southward where the “Talofa” -had gone to steal the inhabitants to sell them in the labor markets -of the South Seas. Captain Scott he did fear. He feared his cold, -calculating but nevertheless diabolical temper, backed by a physical -strength almost superhuman. Ever since leaving Suva, Stump had been -brooding over his misdeeds. Now he must finally make up his mind. He -wanted to get clear of the life he now hated. He wanted to be free -of the fear of being arrested and put behind prison bars. He wanted -to part forever from the man he so much feared. He was not entirely -ungrateful, nor did he harbor extreme revenge against Captain Scott. -Yet if he opposed him, he must, to succeed, betray him into the hands -of the law even if by so doing he arrived there himself. - -After dark the “Talofa” was put under more canvas and headed upon a -compass course set by the captain. - -An hour later Captain Scott and his mate, Stump, stood again together -near the wheel. There were no lights except a dim lantern set in a deck -bucket. - -“Stump,” the captain said pleasantly, “how’d you like to be captain of -the ‘Talofa’?” - -The mate glanced up in surprise. - -“You’ll have to be taught navigation,” the captain added. “That’s most -all you need. A little chart reading and practice in picking your way -among the reefs.” - -“I navigated the ‘Pango’ from the Ellice Islands to Strong Island,” -Stump reminded him. - -“So you did,” Captain Scott replied. - -“Well, maybe you’ll do,” he added, after a slight pause. He took the -lantern out of the bucket and held it over the chart of the Kapuan -Islands. Then he handed the lantern to Stump. - -“Hold this,” he directed, “and I’ll give you a lesson in navigating.” - -With parallel rulers, dividers and pencil, the captain laid down a line -from a position he had made on the chart; then he transferred the line -with the parallel rulers to the compass printed on the chart, and read -the compass direction of the line. - -“There’s where I figured we were at dark,” he said to the attentive -Stump. “There’s the entrance to the reef at Saluafata, and that’s our -compass course. Southeast, I make it.” Then he stepped off the distance -with the dividers. “Fifteen miles it is.” He glanced over the side and -then up at the slack canvas. “I guess we’re making about four knots, so -about eleven o’clock we should be hearing the surf on the reef.” - -Captain Scott took the lantern and again placed it within the bucket. - -“I reckon I can navigate,” Stump said to himself. High hopes came into -his mind, and if Captain Scott could have read them he would not have -been so sure of winning back Stump’s friendship. The mate’s thoughts -had at first been upon Suva, and his desire to go back and square -himself with the people before whom Captain Scott had humiliated him. -Especially, Stump had wanted to tell the young girl who had tried -to make him a better man that she had done him some good. Once the -captain of the “Talofa,” he could try to be a better man. That in -accepting such a position in command of a vessel owned by Captain -Scott, he would be unable to cast off his old life, did not occur to -him. In fact Stump did not consider as crimes the many acts they had -committed, and were committing. To Stump a thing was a crime only -when the perpetrator was caught in the act and put in jail. Stump -knew that he owed his immunity to Captain Scott. Once in Suva without -the captain, Stump thought he could square himself with the girl, and -incidentally get even with Captain Scott. - -As he took the lantern from Stump, Scott held it up for an instant and -observed his mate’s face. What he saw there did not seem to worry him. -“I guess that offer will keep his tongue quiet,” he mused. “With an -American war-ship in port, Stump’s apt to meet some friends ashore and -say too much.” - -“Hold her on this course, Mr. Stump,” the captain said officially. “I’m -going to turn in for forty winks. You can call me at ten o’clock, and -then get the crew all up on deck.” Stump grunted and leaned over to -look at the compass. He saw the lubber’s point was on the course the -captain had figured out from the chart. Captain Scott descended the -ladder to the cabin. - -Stump suddenly took up the lantern and placed it on the covered chart -table. With the dividers he measured off a distance on the black line -the captain had drawn and then with the rulers he took off a course to -another point on the island. - -“South by east,” he exclaimed in an undertone. “Twelve miles to Ukula -harbor. We could do it in two hours at this speed.” He glanced aloft. -The canvas was drawing well, the booms lying about three points on -the lee quarter. The wind was at east northeast. The ship was heading -southeast, and therefore about two points “free.” South by east would -bring the wind one point abaft the weather beam. - -Stump, after satisfying himself of the feasibility of his suddenly -conceived plan, proceeded to put it into execution. Picking his way -across the sleeping forms on the deck, he made his way forward to the -galley, where the blacksmith’s forge was lashed. That day he had been -at work making a weld of wrought steel to replace a spreader for the -topmast backstays. With this bar of steel in his hands, he glanced -into the galley. It was empty, but the coffee kettle, still hot, was -on the stove. As he poured himself a cup, he ran over in his mind the -risk he was taking. His timid soul quailed. Had he the courage to carry -through this bold plan of revenge? In the harbor of Ukula Captain Scott -had said was a Yankee man-of-war. To bring the notorious “Bully” Scott -into the arms of the law, red handed, with black boys and guns for the -natives, would be a stroke of diplomacy which would bring fame to the -name of Benjamin Stump throughout all the South Sea Islands. A better -reward than the command of the “Talofa”! Once Scott was behind the -jail bars, convicted of a felony, all his black career would be told -by those who would no longer fear to tell the truth. The girl in Suva -would hear of it, and would believe her advice had influenced him to -bring to justice this sheep in wolf’s clothing, the bold schemer who -made others do his evil work. - -“Thinks I ain’t on to navigation,” he chuckled. “Wasn’t in an iron -war-ship for nothing and helped the navigator to make magnets out of -steel bars to fix his compass. - -“I don’t owe him anything,” he added, when his conscience troubled -him as he remembered how Captain Scott had paid his fine at Shanghai. -“He’s gotten his money’s worth out of me, long ago. The score’s on my -side now. I’d rather go to jail anyway than to sail with him longer. I -swore I’d kill him when I got a chance after he broke my arm with that -belaying-pin. He can’t prove nothing against me; that Solomon Islander -was accidentally drowned, and the other things he knows of---- Well, -I’m sick of being treated like a dog, and that’s the end of it.” - -The warm coffee revived his waning courage, and determinedly he started -aft to the wheel. He laid his steel bar against the rail and took his -stand behind the helmsman. - -“There’s a pot of coffee on the galley,” he said to Mata, the -half-breed Fijian quartermaster. “I’ll mind the wheel while you get a -cup.” He had no fear that the man would refuse. - -Mata turned over the wheel to Stump with alacrity, and with a grunt of -thanks disappeared forward. - -Now was his chance. He was not quite sure that the plan would work. -He did not understand the science of magnetic attraction. He was only -following blindly what he had seen the American naval officer do some -years before. - -His frame trembling with nervous eagerness, he eased the helm spoke by -spoke. The “Talofa” pitched and rolled more heavily as her bow turned -farther from the wind. Then Stump was fearful lest the wind might be -shifting and might catch the sails aback and jibe the heavy booms, thus -carrying away the sheets. At south by east he steadied. A bright star -almost directly ahead was just visible along the line of the two masts. -Disregarding the compass he steered for the star, taking a last glance -at the compass. It still read south by east. To reach out and secure -the bar of steel was accomplished in a second. He put it alongside the -binnacle. The compass swung slowly away and came to rest within a point -of the old course. He raised the bar and brought it closer against -the wooden binnacle. The course was within a few degrees of the one -the captain had set. Releasing the helm for an instant he tied the bar -securely to the binnacle. The sails shivered and the mainsail gave one -loud flap that brought Mata in sudden haste to his side. - -“The breeze’s been hauling astern,” Stump said, “and those booms are -uneasy.” - -Mata took the wheel. Glancing quickly into the compass bowl, he saw the -course was correct. - -“I’ll ease off the sheets; it’ll make her lie easy,” Stump explained, -as he hurried away to carry out his intention. He was filled -with joyous apprehension--joyful at the success of his plan, but -apprehensive that it would be discovered. He eased off the main fore -and jib sheets until the sails were spanking full, giving more speed, -then he walked, with apparent unconcern, back to the wheel. - -“Getting in near the land, I reckon,” he said. “Wind’s apt to blow -different in there.” - -Mata seemed puzzled, but his untrained mind could not conceive that -everything was else but natural. A sudden change of wind meant to him -the approach of a storm, but the sky showed no evidence, nor did the -barometer which he had read not an hour ago. - -As near as Stump could figure the schooner was now approaching Ukula -harbor at a speed of nearly six knots. - -An hour passed. Then Stump grew restless. Taking off his shoes he -tiptoed down the companion ladder to the cabin. All there was in -darkness. He listened. He could hear the captain’s regular breathing. -He was asleep. Turning to steal back his foot encountered an -obstruction, and he fell heavily on the deck. - -“Is that you, Stump?” Captain Scott asked, suddenly awaking. “Is it ten -already?” - -“’Tain’t much past two bells,” Stump hastened to answer. “Wind’s -hauling to northward. I was a-going to tell you if you were awake.” - -The captain grunted. Stump waited in silence. No answer. The captain -was again asleep. Stump moved, this time more cautiously, up the hatch. - -The night was dark. The sky, brilliant with stars, accentuated the -shrouded deep. Undefined shadowy shapes above the southern horizon -Stump knew to be the high mountain range of the islands of Ukula. - -Within an hour’s time lights made their appearance. As time wore on -more and more lights sprang up from the sea. Stump, despite the fear of -his master’s vengeance, smiled grimly. These lights were in the town of -Ukula and on board the anchored war-ships. The “Talofa” was being drawn -as by a loadstone to its deserved retribution. - -The lights came nearer. Stump glanced anxiously at the clock inside the -companion hatch. The hands pointed to quarter past nine o’clock. Now he -thought he could hear the thunder of the surf beating upon the reef. - -Mata seemed wrapped in characteristic native reserve. If he saw the -lights ahead, he considered them not his concern. - -“Fishing on the reef at Saluafata,” Stump said finally to relieve the -tension on his own nerves. - -Mata gazed fixedly at the lights for nearly a minute. - -“Ukula,” he exclaimed, nodding his head in that direction. “More better -you speak cap’n.” - -“It can’t be Ukula,” Stump exclaimed, his voice feigning surprise at -the suggestion. - -“Big reef, plenty sharks. Cap’n Scott smell the channel, you no can -see.” Mata gave his advice in short sentences. - -As the “Talofa” approached, Stump’s nerve began to fail him. To wreck -the schooner was more than he contemplated, yet if Mata could recognize -Ukula, Captain Scott surely would at the first glance and defeat the -plan. To call Captain Scott now would end in putting the schooner about -and steering out to sea. Stump then would have risked his captain’s -anger for no end. The would-be navigator had been confident that he -could find the narrow entrance between the reefs, but with the glare -of lights in his eyes, his mind was in utter bewilderment. He was in -momentary terror of hearing the roar of the surf under the “Talofa’s” -bow and the grinding of her keel on the treacherous reef. - -“Shark,” Mata exclaimed pointing to a monster black fin, traveling -along near at hand to leeward of the schooner. - -Stump was seized with a sudden wild panic. His motor nerves became -paralyzed. The confusion of lights and the ever increasing roar of the -surf caused his knees to tremble and his heart to almost stop beating. -A voice behind him, which a few minutes earlier would have brought -terror to his soul, now fell like sweet music upon his ear. - -“What’s the meaning of this, Mr. Stump?” Captain Scott’s tone, though -quiet, betrayed great concern. “Shorten sail, sir!” he shouted. “We -must be nearly on the reef.” Then of a sudden the situation dawned upon -Captain Scott. Stump was energetically kicking the sleeping sailors to -wakefulness, bawling out his orders to “let go the gear” and “man the -down-hauls.” - -“Great guns!” the captain cried aghast. “It’s Ukula.” - -Mata grunted an affirmative. - -“Bear a hand there.” Captain Scott’s voice could be heard above the -thunder of flapping canvas. “Douse everything. Get this speed off her.” -He glanced anxiously into the compass; the schooner was on her course. - -“Compass gone plumb crazy,” he exclaimed. “You’ve got a jack-knife on!” -He turned savagely upon the helmsman, feeling for the knife usually -carried on a lanyard about the waist, but Mata was not guilty of this -great nautical misdemeanor. - -In but a few minutes the nimble crew had gotten all sail off the -schooner, yet the fresh breeze still carried her toward the harbor. - -“Mr. Stump, out on the bowsprit with you,” the captain ordered. -He himself had gone to the forecastle, directing in his clear, -far-reaching voice the helmsman at the wheel aft. - -A white, specter-like line suddenly appeared close aboard, ahead and to -starboard. - -Captain Scott was now full master of the situation. To the left of the -line of breakers was deep water. - -“Starboard your helm,” he cried. Then, “Steady so.” The “Talofa’s” bow -was heading between two long lines of surf, while ahead were the lights -of a large vessel, and between her and the schooner, Captain Scott -could see, was deep water. - -As they drew nearer the vessel took shape out of the darkness. - -“Ship ahoy,” a hoarse voice hailed the “Talofa.” - -Captain Scott purposely waited a repetition of the challenge. He was -thinking deeply. The silhouette of the war-ship bore nearly abeam. -If he gave the schooner’s right name he would stand a better chance -of weathering the visit from the war-ship which would be made when -he anchored. Subterfuge would only lessen his chances. It had been -too late when he had come on deck to put the vessel about and seek -safety. The reef was too close aboard. Now, once inside the harbor, to -turn and head out to sea would put his vessel under suspicion, and a -search-light in combination with a few shells would bring him back. - -“The ‘Talofa’ schooner from Fiji, Captain Scott in command,” he -answered, loud and distinctly. “What ship is that?” - -“The United States Cruiser ‘Sitka,’” came the answering hail. - -The shrill notes of a boatswain’s pipe on board the war-ship, followed -by a deep throated call and a hurry of shod feet, came distinctly -across the water. - -The “Talofa” forged slowly ahead. Her bow was swung to port as she -nosed her way into the inner harbor. - -“Let go the anchor,” Captain Scott cried out disgustedly, and as the -chain rattled out, he quietly walked forward and directed the sailor -tending it to “haul to and secure.” Then he called in Stump, still -sitting inert on the bowsprit end. - -“A nice mess you’ve made of it,” he said through shut jaws. Stump -crawled in slowly, stopping just out of arm’s reach. As agile as a cat, -Captain Scott suddenly cleared the distance and his strong hand seized -the shrinking mate by the scruff of the neck. He shook him until his -bones rattled. - -“Out with it,” he exclaimed. His voice to Stump had the tone of rusty -files. “How did it happen? What did you do to the compass?” - -Stump saw no avenue of escape. The uncanniness of Captain Scott’s -intuition awed him to his resolve for truthfulness. - -“A boat’s alongside,” Stump sputtered as his shifting and terrified -gaze caught sight of a shadowy form in the water making the side of the -schooner. The diversion was timely for the trembling Stump. Captain -Scott released his hold, but the guilty mate, off his guard, received -the full force of Captain Scott’s iron fist squarely under the jaws. -His body bent limply backward and fell heavily upon the deck, where -it lay motionless, while Captain Scott strolled unconcernedly aft to -receive his visitors. - - - - -CHAPTER V - -THE “TALOFA” IN UKULA - - -After dinner all the officers of the “Sitka,” as was the custom, took -chairs upon the quarter-deck. Phil and Sydney, having finished their -unpacking, had joined the circle. The subject of conversation was the -course of local events. All looked forward with ill concealed delight -at the prospects of active service. - -“These natives are great fighters,” Ensign Patterson exclaimed -admiringly, “only they don’t know the rules of the game. A few hundred -white men could hold their own against as many thousand.” - -“Don’t bank too much on that argument if you are lucky enough to -command a company of sailors ashore,” Lieutenant Sargeant returned -thoughtfully. “The Herzovinian sailors some years ago were defeated and -many killed because their leader underrated the soldierly ability of -the Kapuan warrior.” - -“It’s certainly a travesty on our civilization.” The doctor joined in -the general conversation. “Here are three war-ships, each with a couple -of hundred good rifle shots. There are probably all told ten thousand -warriors in the islands. As far as I can learn, two of these war-ships -are pulling for Panu-Mafili and one for Kataafa. If we all three got -together and told the natives to go peaceably to their homes, and -then if we proceeded to quietly decide to agree upon something--well, -useless spilling of blood could be averted, at any rate.” - -“The trouble with your argument is, doctor,” Lieutenant Sargeant -replied, “that it’s too far up in the clouds. Remember we’re all -human and living on the earth together. All three nations covet these -islands. Some day one will get them, so the question is simply which?” - -“Why should we be interested?” Phil inquired modestly. “We have no -trade here, and but a handful of our countrymen live in the islands.” - -“And most of them,” Lieutenant Sargeant replied, “are people one cannot -be proud to acknowledge. But our real interest is to get a coaling -station here. Tua-Tua is a fine land-locked harbor, and is on the -steamer route from both San Francisco and Panama to New Zealand and -Australia. Herzovinia may have all the rest if we can hold the island -of Kulila with the harbor of Tua-Tua. That’s why we have a war-ship -here.” - -“What does England want out of it?” Ensign Patterson inquired. - -“England,” Lieutenant Sargeant answered, “is interested to see that -Herzovinia does not grab too much. Through England’s help we may be -able to get Tua-Tua; without it, against the Herzovinian diplomacy, we -should get nothing.” - -“The natives of Kapua stand to lose in any case,” Sydney remarked. “I -for one would like to see the natives remain independent, and hope that -this will be the time when all hands ‘bust’ in their calculations.” - -The captain of the British cruiser had been paying a visit to Commander -Tazewell, and Phil, on duty as junior officer of the watch, was called -upon an hour later to see that the English captain’s gig was manned for -him at the gangway. - -The two commanders stood in the shadow of the poop-deck conversing in -low, serious tones. Phil had found that the boat was ready alongside -and had advanced to report. The figure of a man, also in the shadow, -his body bent forward in a listening attitude, caught his eye. Phil -stopped, and at once the man drew back and walked silently away. Phil -crossed over to investigate the identity of the evident eavesdropper. -Suddenly from the gloom of the deck the captain’s orderly appeared. - -“Were you looking for me, sir?” the sailor said respectfully. - -Phil hesitated. He was on the point of denouncing him as an -eavesdropper. - -“I thought I heard you call, sir,” the sailor added apologetically. “I -was on a message forward for the captain.” - -“Yes, report to the captain that the English gig is at the gangway,” -Phil ordered. The midshipman decided he had confronted the wrong man. -“Did you pass any one as you came aft?” he asked as an afterthought. - -“Yes, sir,” the orderly replied readily. “Just there a man passed going -forward. I took him for one of the electrical gang. He came out of the -cabin, I think.” - -The orderly crossed the deck, saluted stiffly and made his report. The -two captains walked slowly toward the gangway. Phil took his place to -the left of the regular officer of the deck. - -“Good-night,” the Englishman said, his hand to his cap. “You’ll find us -ready when you say the word, Tazewell,” he added in a loud aside as he -briskly descended the ladder to his boat. - -Phil hesitated whether to tell the captain of his suspicions. The man -might have been an electrician, as the orderly had said. Phil crossed -over to the exact spot where he had seen the man stand and tried to -strike the same attitude. An electric globe light fixture was above his -head, but it was not lighted. He reached up and turned the switch. The -light did not burn. That was why the deck there was in shadow. The man -must have been an electrician who was examining the fixture. The thing -was so simple that Phil tried to dismiss the incident from his mind. - -“What is that orderly’s name?” he asked of the boatswain’s mate of the -watch. - -“Schultz,” Boatswain’s Mate O’Neil replied. “He’s a ‘sea-lawyer’[12] -too, Mr. Perry. Ain’t worth his ration of ‘salt-horse’[13] either.” - -“Then why does the captain keep him as his orderly?” Phil asked. - -“Search me, sir, except he’s a good parrot for messages,” O’Neil -suggested. “An orderly, you know, sir, hasn’t any use for brains. He’s -just telegraph wire.” - -Phil smiled at O’Neil’s analogy. - -“Schultz,” he thought. “I’d feel surer that it wasn’t he if his name -had suggested some other nationality. But then there are a lot of such -names in our navy.” - -Other and more stirring incidents drove Schultz from Phil’s mind. - -Phil and the officer of the deck, Lieutenant Morrison, were pacing the -quarter-deck scarcely twenty minutes later. The older officer was one -to whom the midshipman had immediately taken a great fancy. He was a -man of strong character and even temper, and probably ten years the -lad’s senior in both age and experience. - -“It looks as if the Kapuan volcano were going to erupt again, Mr. -Perry,” he said in his quiet, thoughtful way. “There’s been peace among -the natives for nearly five years, and they are in prime condition -to be stirred into a war. The triple government has succeeded under -a strong native king. The dead monarch, Laupepe, was really a highly -educated savage. Now there is only one native with sufficient influence -to avert a war, and he is too partial to Herzovinia to be acceptable -to either our country or England. You know we have our eye on Tua-Tua -as a coaling station, and if Kataafa becomes king our opportunity of -acquiring that harbor will vanish in smoke.” - -“Do you believe there will be a war?” Phil asked eagerly. “Will the -sailors be landed to fight against the natives?” - -“It’s been done before,” Lieutenant Morrison replied. “It really seems -a heartless thing to do, but that is the only means of enforcing your -will on a savage. Force is the only argument he understands. Kataafa -has established his government at Kulinuu Point, you know, and sent out -word to all the islands for his adherents to gather. It’s unlikely that -he will give in peaceably if the chief justice’s decision is against -him. Of course it is no secret who is supporting him in his attitude. -The Kapuan firm under Klinger is his banker.” - -“There’s a sailing vessel just beyond the breakers, sir,” the -quartermaster on watch reported from the after bridge. “She’s not -carrying lights and seems to be heading for the entrance.” - -Both officers strained their eyes in an endeavor to make out more -plainly a dim shape which the quartermaster’s trained eyes had -discovered. Phil’s thoughts went back at once to the schooner seen from -Alice’s Mission Hill, far out on the ocean. - -“Only a trading schooner,” Lieutenant Morrison pronounced as he -focussed his night binoculars upon the ill-defined silhouette of a -large schooner under full canvas. “By George, she’s coming through in -yachtsman’s style. Not a sheet started, in a stiff breeze too, and not -five hundred yards from the reef. - -“There! She shortens sail,” he exclaimed admiringly. “Her skipper knows -the harbor, that’s certain, or he wouldn’t be taking such chances.” - -The sailing vessel was plainly seen to take in all her sails almost -at the same time, and the next minute she was in the narrow channel -between the barrier reefs upon which the sea was breaking heavily. - -“Can it be the ‘Talofa’?” Phil asked excitedly. “Captain ‘Bully’ -Scott’s ship?” - -Lieutenant Morrison had sent word to the captain of the arrival of a -strange sail, and now he waited her nearer approach to “hail” her. - -Twice the lieutenant’s hail of inquiry was ignored. The schooner was -now abreast, her speed materially decreased, yet still traveling -smartly through the water. - -“The ‘Talofa’ schooner from Fiji, Captain Scott in command.” The answer -was bold and distinct. - -“By Jove! How did you guess it?” the lieutenant exclaimed. Then he -answered the “Talofa’s” inquiry. - -Commander Tazewell had come up from below and stood at the side of the -officer of the deck. - -“Let Mr. Perry board her,” he ordered quietly, and as the officer of -the deck moved away to give the boatswain’s mate the order to call away -the running boat, Commander Tazewell gave Phil some instructions as to -his conduct to the captain of the merchant ship. - -“Scott disclaims American nationality,” he said. “I hear he now flies -the Herzovinian flag. You must go on board under the impression that he -is an American and therefore under the control of our consul while in -the harbor. Ask him of what his cargo consists. I must leave the rest -to your good judgment.” - -Commander Tazewell waited until he heard the rattle of anchor chain -as the schooner anchored, then returned to his cabin, while Phil took -command of the boat. - -“To the schooner,” he said, turning to the sailor in the coxswain’s -box. “Is that you, O’Neil?” he exclaimed in some surprise. - -“Yes, sir. I happened to be handy, so Mr. Morrison told me to get in. -The regular coxswain wasn’t on deck,” O’Neil replied. “I’ve been -hearing of this fellow ‘Bully’ Scott ashore. All the natives say he’s -bringing arms for the Kapuan firm, to be sold to Kataafa. These natives -are like women; they can’t keep secrets; it ain’t in them.” - -“Why does he come into Ukula, then?” Phil asked. - -“Oh, that’s like ‘Bully’ Scott. He could have taken them anywhere else, -but he enjoys doing something unexpected,” O’Neil answered admiringly. - -“He has probably then already landed his guns,” Phil said, -disappointedly. “Of course, that’s the explanation. His guilty cargo is -no longer on board to convict him.” - -O’Neil steered the boat alongside the schooner’s sea ladder, and Phil -swung himself over the low rail. Everything was in darkness around him. - -“Bring that lantern here, you lazy black rascal,” a big, hearty voice -called, and from the darkness Phil saw take shape a figure that he -could have avowed to be that of a Puritan father or a missionary -bishop. A tall man, elderly, dressed in dark clothes, a flowing gray -beard sweeping his expansive chest. The lantern, brought quickly by the -“black rascal,” showed a handsome and benevolent countenance. - -“I am delighted to see you, sir,” he said courteously and in a voice so -refined as to fairly startle Phil. - -“Are you the captain?” the lad stammered, as he accepted the proffered -hand. - -“At your service, sir. Captain ‘Bully’ Scott is the name by which I’m -known in these waters.” - -Phil took a firmer grip upon himself. How much easier he would have -found his task if Captain Scott had been in appearance the pirate he -had pictured him. - -“My captain, Commander Tazewell, of the cruiser ‘Sitka,’ sends his -compliments and wishes a little information. The usual boarding -information, you know.” - -“Walk aft, sir,” Captain Scott requested politely. “You are welcome to -the information,” he continued as he placed the lantern on the deck -table between them, “but I take it, Commander Tazewell supposed my ship -was sailing under American colors.” - -Phil hesitated how to reply. The benevolent eyes were upon him. - -“I can’t say as to that,” the lad replied slowly, “but the general -impression I got was that you were an American citizen.” - -The lantern shed a dim light over the narrow deck space. The -native sailors were busily furling the massive sails. Phil heard -the rhythmical sound of oars in their rowlocks; other boats were -approaching the “Talofa.” He heard the scraping of a boat alongside and -the heavy breathing of a man climbing up the ship’s side. Captain Scott -had left the midshipman to investigate the new arrivals. He had made as -yet no reply to the young officer’s insinuating remark. - -“Why on earth did you enter the harbor?” he heard the newcomer exclaim -as he swung his leg over the rail. Phil recognized the decidedly -foreign accents of Klinger’s voice. - -“Aha!” Phil thought. “Not so innocent after all.” - -Scott answered the question in a strange tongue, and Phil saw Klinger -glance quickly in his direction. - -Phil’s eye as he attentively listened had been fixed upon the compass -binnacle near him. He noted a bar of iron jammed closely against it and -apparently tied in that position. - -“Queer manner of correcting a compass,” he thought. - -The two men at the gangway continued to talk. Phil recognized the -language to be Kapuan, of which he could not understand a word. - -“To-morrow morning, then, I shall be ashore,” Captain Scott said -finally in English. “When will my cargo be ready?” - -“It’s ready now at the plantations,” Klinger answered also in English. -“You’ve got to go for it.” Then he lapsed again into Kapuan. After -a few more minutes the man again climbed down the schooner’s side -and into his boat, then Captain Scott walked aft to join Phil, while -Klinger’s boat pulled swiftly toward the shore. - -“I’m under contract with the Kapuan firm,” Captain Scott said -pleasantly. “That was the manager, Klinger. He is a very disagreeable -fellow, and I shall be glad to finish my business with him and be off.” - -Phil saw there could be nothing further learned from Captain Scott, -yet he was firmly convinced from Klinger’s remark that something -had miscarried. There were a number of questions, however, usual in -boarding an arriving vessel, which he proceeded to ask the captain. - -“Under what flag are you sailing?” Phil inquired. - -“Herzovinian,” Captain Scott replied readily. - -“You have no contraband on board?” the midshipman asked suddenly, his -eyes riveted upon the sea-captain’s face. - -Captain Scott’s benign smile returned. - -“Young man, there’s no longer any profit in firearms.--Is that why your -captain was so prompt to send his officer aboard?” he asked, laughing -as if he enjoyed the joke immensely. “And besides, with the entire -island available for a vessel of the ‘Talofa’s’ draft, Captain Scott -would not be likely to sail into Ukula with a cargo of arms; not while -there are three consuls ashore, and as many war-ships at anchor in the -harbor. My cargo consists of cotton cloth and canned stuffs for the -‘firm,’ and I return to Fiji with a load of ‘copra.’” - -“What is that bar of iron alongside the compass?” Phil asked curiously. -He was firmly convinced that Klinger and Captain Scott were partners in -some unlawful trade, but for the life of him could not see how he could -drag from this benevolent host, albeit pirate and smuggler, information -upon which action could be taken. - -Captain Scott eyed the bar of steel. Phil thought he discerned a slight -start, at least a hesitancy in his manner. - -“That,” the captain replied, “is one of my mate’s clever ideas in -correcting the compass. I don’t know where he learned it, but it seems -very effective.” - -Phil called to his boat, thanked Captain Scott, and was soon returning -to the “Sitka.” - -After he had gone Captain Scott tore the steel bar savagely from the -compass. Then he walked forward to the forecastle. His sailors had -about finished stowing the sails. - -“Stump,” he called. He glanced about the deck. There was no one there. -He picked up his mate’s hat from the spot where the man had fallen -under the blow from Captain Scott’s fist. He turned toward several -natives who were on the point of going below, their work finished. - -“Find Mr. Stump,” he ordered anxiously. “Look for him at once.” He -himself hurried about the ship, seeking him in every dark corner; but -Stump could not be found. - -“The ungrateful dog!” he cried in a fearful rage. Captain “Bully” Scott -now showed his true colors. He raved and stormed. The natives cowered -away from him. The steel bar in his hand was waved above his head -menacingly. - -“If I ever get him on board here again I’ll smash him into an -unrecognizable blot on the deck,” he raved. “He’s gone! He brought the -‘Talofa’ into Ukula with this bar of steel! He’s probably boasting -at this minute how he did it.” He shook his fist at the war-ship, -whose lights blazed brightly several hundred yards away. “It’s a race -with ‘Bully’ Scott,” he exclaimed. “You think you have me cornered. -To-morrow, or even to-night, you will have the story from my sneaking -mate. Then you will search and discover the arms; but I’ll fool you -yet.” - -A swiftly propelled boat swung up alongside the schooner. A tall man -swung himself with no apparent muscular effort over the rail and stood -in the darkness seeking some one on the schooner. - -Captain Scott, still beside himself with rage, spied the newcomer. His -rage subsided. Again the benevolent expression returned to his face -while a native quickly brought forward the lantern and revealed the -face of Count Rosen. - -“Has the American officer gone?” the count asked hastily, glancing -covertly around. - -Captain Scott nodded. “Asked if I had contraband and seemed satisfied -when I told him if I had I should hardly have brought them into Ukula -when there were other ports in the island free and open.” - -The count’s face showed perplexity. Was this American merchant captain -deceiving him and Klinger? “Why did you come into Ukula?” he asked. - -Captain Scott chuckled. “A little stratagem, count. You see, Klinger -wrote to go to Saluafata, but the ‘Talofa’ preferred Ukula. We have -until daylight to land our cargo. The war-ship will not think we can -do anything before morning. I told Klinger to send over his barges -quietly at once.” - -The count was not satisfied. He did not share the optimism of Captain -Scott. - -With a curt bow he returned to his boat and swiftly rowed toward the -Herzovinian cruiser. As he stepped upon the deck, an officer and -several sailors of the watch met him. They saluted with deep respect. - -“I wish to see your captain upon important business,” he announced. He -was conducted at once to the cabin. - -He remained in consultation only a few minutes. When he returned -accompanied by the captain, a war-ship’s boat was manned, a young -officer in command. Count Rosen bowed graciously to the attentive -captain and entered the boat, sending ashore his own after paying the -helmsman liberally. - -The boat pulled close under the bows of the American cruiser, on its -way to the schooner. The count noticed a war-ship’s boat ready manned -at the gangway. From the schooner came faint sounds of men laboring. -They had already begun to open the hatches. - -Half-way to the schooner a noise as of a swimmer caught the count’s -attentive ear. - -“What is that?” he asked the young officer. At the word of command the -men stopped rowing. Scarcely fifty yards away appeared a man’s head; -he was making rather feeble progress through the water. The boat was -quickly brought alongside the swimmer and the man hauled on board. - -A lantern was held up to his face. It was pale and haggard. The man was -almost exhausted. The count noticed that the swimmer’s face was much -swollen and discolored, as if from a blow. Even in the tropical air his -teeth chattered and speech was nearly impossible. The count took off -his own cape and wrapped it about the trembling figure. Then the boat -pulled for the schooner, several hundred yards away. - -The officer and three men scrambled on board. Two small lighters were -lying alongside the “Talofa,” and a score of “blacks” were making ready -to discharge her cargo. - -The count asked a hurried question. The young officer in his party -saluted and answered in the affirmative, pointing to a bundle under -his arm. The boat waited until a fluttering flag rose slowly to the -peak of the main gaff. It was too dark to distinguish the markings, -but the count knew that the situation had been saved. The “Talofa” was -under the protection of his navy’s flag. - -The count had hardly cleared the gangway before the “Sitka’s” boat -rounded to under the schooner’s stern and shot alongside. - -“If Captain Scott has sold out to his countrymen,” the count exclaimed -to himself, “he will find it difficult to deliver the goods.” - -At the dock he alighted. The rescued man was supported up to the hotel -between two sailors. - -Dry clothes were provided him and from his medicine chest the count -administered a sleeping draught. Once snugly wrapped in blankets in one -of the rooms of the count’s suite, and a native boy sleeping across -the only exit, the count felt sure that the stranger would be on hand -in the morning to explain the mystery of why a white man was swimming -from the “Talofa” toward the “Sitka,” his face bruised and himself half -exhausted. It would be worth all the trouble he had taken to know. - -The count yawned. It was nearly midnight, and in the tropics one must -be an early riser, for the heat of the morning sun does not conduce to -refreshing sleep. He dismissed the sailors who had aided him. Then he -shut his door and threw himself down on his couch to think. - -After several minutes, he rose and penned two notes. Sealing them, he -called one of the attendant natives. - -“Take this one at once,” he directed; “the other,” he added to himself, -“can wait until early to-morrow morning.” - -The native bowed and disappeared upon his errand. - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -THE “TALOFA’S” CARGO - - -Phil, upon his return to the “Sitka,” recounted to his captain -everything that had occurred during his visit to the suspected schooner. - -“I am confident, sir,” he ended, “that Captain Scott has arms on board, -and further, that Klinger is in much concern that he has brought them -openly to this harbor when he might have landed them elsewhere.” - -Commander Tazewell commended the midshipman for his energy. “It’s a -difficult question to settle,” he said. “I have no proof of Scott’s -nationality. He was born in San Francisco, they say, of Irish-Scotch -parents. He has no right to sail under the Herzovinian flag unless his -vessel is owned by people of that nation or he himself is a subject of -that country.” - -The commander paced his cabin for several minutes thoughtfully in -silence. Upon his shoulders great responsibilities rested. Every act -must be carefully considered. Where other nations were so intimately -concerned, especially in the irritable political atmosphere of Kapua, -where every white man’s hand seemed against his white neighbor and the -poor, innocent native is but the instrument upon which the selfish -desires are to be perpetrated, ill judged acts had best be avoided. - -“I can’t see that we can do more now, Mr. Perry,” he added in finality. -“I shall have the officer of the deck keep his weather eye on the -‘Talofa’ during the night.” - -As Phil rejoined the officer of the deck, six bells were striking. The -“Talofa” was in darkness except for her single anchor stay light. The -night was quiet. The sea breeze had decreased in force. - -It was not long before the watchers on the American war-ship discovered -that the two canoe shaped barges of the Kapuan firm were being poled -out toward the anchored schooner. When this was surely noted and -reported to the captain, he ordered the boat be held ready and for -Phil to stand by to return and investigate. - -“Probably getting ready for the morning,” Lieutenant Morrison suggested. - -“If there are arms there,” Phil replied, “and I am inclined to think -there must be, Captain Scott will either try to unload to-night or else -he will leave them in his holds until he arrives at a safer place.” - -Faint sounds of creaking tackles and the noise of opening hatches came -across the intervening water. - -“They are going to unload to-night,” Phil exclaimed. “What a splendid -nerve that fellow Captain Scott must have.” - -The startling news brought Commander Tazewell on deck. - -“Have the gig manned,” he ordered quietly, “and let Mr. Perry take the -whale-boat and investigate what is going forward there. I must break -the ice between us and the Herzovinian commander. I cannot stand idly -by and see such an outrage committed.” - -Once more, with O’Neil in the coxswain’s box, Phil was heading for -the “Talofa.” He had barely cleared the “Sitka’s” side when another -boat came out of the darkness ahead, crossed the whale-boat’s bow and -sheered alongside the schooner. - -“From the Herzovinian war-ship,” O’Neil exclaimed. - -Phil’s pulse quickened. The situation was growing acute. - -“If it comes to a fight,” he said excitedly, “we are two to one,” -pointing in the direction of the British cruiser, “but a fight here -would plunge three great nations into war.” - -“It’s only a bluff, sir,” O’Neil sized up the situation sagely. “Those -fellows are the cleverest dodgers you ever laid eyes on. They can fight -all right, there’s no denying that fact, but their cleverest dodge is -to play politics. I’ve seen them do it against the ‘chinks’ in China, -and against the dagos in South America. When a Herzovinian officer goes -too far the king with his right hand gives him a hook in the solar -plexus, and then, to soften the medicine, with his left hangs the order -of the red tailed eagle around his neck.” - -Phil laughed nervously. “What do we do to our officers who overstep -the bounds of international etiquette?” he asked, thinking of the -predicament in which Commander Tazewell found himself suddenly involved. - -“That’s easy to answer, sir,” O’Neil replied readily enough. “He gets -the solar plexus blow from the man at the ‘top,’ and unless he’s -popular with a few big newspaper editors, usually dies an official -death. Now Admiral Benham, when he belayed that revolution in Brazil -some years ago, was on the point of getting the ‘hook,’ when a friend -of his gave him a great ‘pipe off’ in the New York papers. He made the -admiral a Farragut and an Abraham Lincoln spliced together. The ‘hook’ -was quietly stowed away for future use.” - -As the “Sitka’s” whale-boat was steered alongside, the foreign boat -shoved off. Phil peered eagerly through the darkness. He saw an erect -figure in white in the stern sheets. - -“Looks for all the world like that Herzovinian count,” he exclaimed -excitedly. O’Neil strained his eyes to see, but the boat was rapidly -being swallowed into the night. - -Phil noted the two big cargo canoes alongside the schooner, while he -saw a score or more of figures moving about on the deck above him. -He was on the point of climbing the ladder when a voice from above in -broken English called to him to halt. - -“No one is permit to enter,” the man said. Phil saw that it was a -Herzovinian sailor. - -“I would like to speak to your officer, if there is one there,” Phil -said haughtily. - -“What do you want?” was asked gruffly. “This vessel is chartered by the -Herzovinian government, and it is not permitted to visit.” - -Phil’s anger blazed into flame. For the fraction of a second he was -on the point of leading his men up to forcibly capture the schooner, -but the cool, restraining hand of O’Neil, an old friend frequently -encountered by this impetuous youth, brought second thoughts to ward -off a rash act. - -“Steady, sir,” O’Neil whispered. “There’s a big flag flapping up there. -Can’t tell for sure, but I can guess that it’s the man-of-war flag. -We’ve made them show their hand; don’t spoil it by getting yourself in -trouble.” - -Phil sank back into the boat. His foot had been on the lower rung of -the sea ladder. - -“May I inquire what you are unloading?” he asked. - -There were indistinct whispers from above. - -“Furniture for our consulate,” came the answer after some delay. - -“You are not unloading guns for Kataafa, then?” Phil retorted angrily. - -There was no reply. The sailor continued to block the rail above where -Phil was standing. - -“Shove off, O’Neil,” he exclaimed. “If we stay here longer, I couldn’t -resist the temptation of pitching the whole lot of them overboard.” - -“Excuse me for saying so, Mr. Perry,” O’Neil apologized as the sailors -rowed back to their ship. “You’ve got to learn caution when you’re -playing against those fellows. They are up in diplomacy. They live on -it, and to beat ’em you’ve got to forget you’ve got a temper. It ain’t -at all necessary; in fact, it’s a superfluity.” O’Neil was fond of -using big words, which he always accented on every syllable, as if by -so doing their vague meaning would be more readily grasped. - -When Phil returned Commander Tazewell was on the point of embarking to -visit the Herzovinian war-ship, but after listening to the startling -intelligence brought by Phil he at once decided that a visit at this -time of night would be barren of results. Kataafa would probably obtain -arms for his warriors through the Kapuan firm. A higher power than the -Herzovinian commander had so ordained. The fact was, however, worth -knowing. Plans must be made to meet this new development. He might send -trusty men ashore to spy on those who were unloading the “Talofa.” - -Just then a native canoe ranged alongside, while the paddler held up a -letter. The quartermaster went down to receive it; it was for Commander -Tazewell. - -The captain opened it eagerly. The handwriting was unfamiliar. - -“My dear Commander Tazewell,” he read in perfectly written English. -He had already glanced at the bottom for the name and had seen “Your -obedient servant, Felix Rosen.” He continued to read: “I crave a -thousand pardons, but an opportunity has arisen for me to take a -cruise about the Kapuan Islands in a schooner. She is now unloading. -The captain of our war-ship was kind enough to come to my aid and -direct the work. I believe there is some government freight among the -cargo. I hope to get away in the morning, so our trip to ‘Papasea’ must -only be postponed. I have also excused myself to the ladies.” - -Commander Tazewell as he finished uttered an exclamation of -bewilderment. He handed the letter to Lieutenant Morrison and then to -Phil. - -Phil read the letter, while his indignation increased at every line of -the carefully worded explanation. He was on the point of condemning the -entire crowd of schemers when his glance fell upon the eager face of -the captain’s orderly, Schultz. - -“Well!” Commander Tazewell exclaimed. “They’ve had the last word. -There’s no getting behind that letter.” - -He turned to Lieutenant Morrison, standing expectantly waiting to hear -what would be the next move. “You may secure the boats for the night,” -he said. - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -THE KAPUAN FIRM - - -Carl Klinger had been sitting in his office at the Kapuan firm’s store -when a loud knocking aroused him from his reveries. He rose quickly to -open the door. - -“What do you want?” he inquired roughly in Kapuan as he threw open -the door. A native, much out of breath from running, confronted him. -Klinger saw it was one of the pilot’s boat-crew from the pilot station -on Matautu Point at the entrance to the harbor. - -“The ‘Talofa’ coming in through the entrance,” the man replied. -“Captain Svenson send me to tell you quick.” - -“How do you know it’s the ‘Talofa’?” Klinger asked incredulously. -He could not believe that Captain Scott would be so foolhardy as to -enter Ukula harbor with his cargo. Twenty Solomon Island natives to -work on the plantations, actually kidnapped from their homes, beside -several thousand Snyder rifles with millions of rounds of ammunition -constituted the greatest part of the “Talofa’s” cargo. Had “Bully” -Scott gone mad? - -“No other but Captain Scott could find the entrance to the harbor on -a night like this,” the man replied positively. Klinger noted the -utter blackness of the night. He was enough of a sailorman himself to -understand the dangers attending the navigation of a vessel so large as -the “Talofa.” Even the pilots preferred to wait until daylight before -bringing a vessel through the treacherous coral reefs. - -“Wait,” he ordered. Then returning to his desk he wrote several pages -of a letter, sealed and addressed it, then gave it to the native -messenger. - -“Take this to the Tivoli Hotel,” he instructed. “Find Count Rosen and -give it into no other hands.” - -From the porch of the store he gazed upon the harbor, but the darkness -shrouded the vessel for which his anxious eyes were searching. His mind -was sorely troubled. “Bully” Scott was not a character to pin one’s -faith to. That hardened pirate went where either his fancy led him or -where the greatest amount of coin awaited him. The guns had already -been paid for with Klinger’s money; only the freight charges were due. -The Solomon Islanders were Scott’s own venture. The one balanced the -other. If he should betray the Kapuan firm by permitting the war-ships -to confiscate them as contraband, then the presence of the blacks -would be known and must convict the pirate in any court of the South -Seas. Nationality could not protect slave trading, although it might -the importation of arms. The “Talofa” was sailing illegally under -Herzovinian protection. Count Rosen, while in Fiji, had arranged for -that with Scott. A word from Klinger would cause Scott to be arrested -straightway and taken before the chief justice. The penalty for slave -trading was at least ten years in a penal colony. - -“He may have discharged both the slaves and the guns,” he exclaimed. -Then he apparently realized that this was impossible, for he added -aloud, “Couldn’t have done that, or I should have heard of it by now.” -As he still gazed seaward he saw the lights of a war-ship disappear -one at a time, and knew that the schooner was then passing between the -man-of-war and himself. - -He called loudly to arouse some of the native help who lived in houses -back of the store. - -A native finally appeared. - -“Get the boat boys,” Klinger ordered hurriedly. “I shall require them -at once.” - -The schooner anchored only a few hundred yards from him before -the sleepy natives had launched his boat. Klinger paced the sand -impatiently. He was consumed with anxiety for the safety of his guns. -Thirty thousand dollars was to be the profit upon them. And besides, -the decision of the chief justice might be given at any moment. Kataafa -must have these guns before the decision was rendered, for that was -required to carry out the “coup de main” which must throw the Kapuan -Islands into the lap of his country. - -Angry and bitter at the man who had played fast and loose with his -plans, Klinger climbed the “Talofa’s” side and met the culprit face to -face. - -Klinger’s first question was more forceful than elegant. Captain -“Bully” Scott only smiled in his urbane style and answered the question -in Kapuan. - -“Hold your tongue. There’s an American naval officer standing aft by -the compass.” - -Klinger saw by the dim lantern’s light the sheen of a white duck -uniform. - -“What’s he doing here?” he asked suspiciously. - -“Only a matter of natural curiosity,” Scott replied. - -“Tell me why you didn’t follow my instructions,” Klinger asked. “Have -you the guns on board?” - -“I have everything that I started out to bring here,” Scott returned, -“and what’s more I’m going to land everything as snugly as a down East -whaler in winter quarters.” - -Klinger felt much relieved. The calm confidence of the man impressed -him. - -“How?” was all he could ask. - -“Send off your cargo lighters as soon as you can,” Scott explained. -“Get the count to ask for a few sailors from your war-ship to stay here -and prevent the English or Americans from watching us. The count is -then to charter the ‘Talofa’ for a pleasure trip around the group of -islands, starting as soon as we are unloaded. We shall unload part of -the cargo to-night, at once.” - -“I don’t dare to take the guns ashore here,” Klinger exclaimed. “We -can’t keep the knowledge away from these prying natives.” - -“Just leave that to me. They don’t go ashore here; that’s my plan,” -Captain Scott replied soothingly. “You do as I tell you. That’s all you -need worry about. Does the count know we are in?” he asked. - -“I sent him a note as soon as I learned it,” Klinger answered. “I don’t -yet see what was your object in coming here. Saluafata was wide open.” - -“All you’ve got to figure on,” Scott said quietly, “is that I’m here. -Say something in English now to throw that young cub naval officer off -the scent and go hurry off those lighters. If you see the count tell -him to come off here or go and get those sailors first.” - -Klinger’s mind was relieved of much of the strain of uncertainty, yet -he felt far from sure that Scott’s plan would succeed as easily as the -optimistic Scott imagined. He had not entirely acquitted Scott of the -charge of perfidy. - -The two men then spoke in English in regard to the return cargo of the -“Talofa,” and parted apparently to meet again in the morning. - -As Klinger rowed ashore he met Count Rosen going out to the schooner. -The two boats stopped alongside each other. Klinger hurriedly outlined -Scott’s plan as far as he had learned it. - -“I’ll drop aboard just to satisfy myself that he isn’t betraying us,” -the count said to himself as the two boats went their several ways. - -As the count left the “Talofa” and rowed toward the Herzovinian -war-ship, he was nearly convinced that Scott was playing fair, but upon -his return after picking up the white man swimming toward the American -war-ship, distrust of the pirate again appeared strongly in his mind. - -Just before dawn Klinger saw the last one of the many boxes brought -ashore from the schooner carried and piled upon the porch of the -store. The twenty new slaves brought by Scott, for whom he had paid a -handsome sum of money to the schooner’s captain, had been set to work -unloading, and they were now on their way under native guard to the -Vaileli plantation. - -The boxes landed were of all sizes, and most of them were left unopened -upon the porch of the store. Klinger stationed two of his boat boys as -guard, and then turned in upon the small bed in his office. - -“Mighty queer proceedings,” he exclaimed as he closed his tired eyes. -“But I guess the count can handle the situation.” - -When Count Rosen awakened the next morning, his first act was to open -the blinds and glance out upon the harbor. Everything was peaceful -and serene; the “Talofa” lay snugly at anchor. The firm’s lighters -were alongside the dock in front of the store. It was low tide and the -fringing reef was peopled with natives gathering the many edibles, -turtle, crayfish and a variety of shell-fish, that form a great -proportion of the Kapuan diet. The count entered the adjoining room; -the memory of the man picked up from the water the night before had -suddenly recurred to him. The room was empty. He called loudly for his -native boy. - -“Where is the stranger?” he asked. - -“Gone out for a bath,” the boy answered innocently, showing his white -teeth in a childlike smile. - -“Bring him back at once,” the count commanded. “Tell him I wish to see -him.” - -The boy hastened on his errand, jingling several pieces of silver he -had acquired from the very stranger whom he was seeking. - -The count dressed hastily and himself took up the search for the -missing man. - -On the beach in front of the hotel he encountered his boy quietly -sitting in the sand, his gaze upon the panorama of the bay. - -“Where is he?” the count exclaimed, much annoyed at the boy’s -indifference. - -“Afraid he’s not here,” the boy acknowledged. - -If a look could kill the native would have died on the spot. - -It was evident that the stranger had sought other protection. - -Much annoyed at losing this man, whom he believed might have given him -information of value to hold over the head of Captain Scott, he turned -his steps toward his consulate. - -Mr. Carlson was drinking tea on his porch when the count arrived. - -“I came to tell you,” the count said condescendingly, “that I am taking -a trip on that schooner anchored in the bay. Klinger discharged the -cargo last night. It was all for the Kapuan firm.” - -The consul should have been consulted first before discharging cargo, -but he knew that to hold his place as consul he must always meet the -demands of Klinger. - -“I’d like to have you give me the clearance papers,” the count -continued. “She will go to the plantations for copra and then return -here. She’s now in ballast.” - -Carlson called his native clerk and told him to prepare the papers. The -count was named as supercargo for the trip. - -After receiving the clearance papers the count did not linger at the -consulate. - -“Remember, Mr. Carlson,” he said as he rose to go, “if the chief -justice decides not to acknowledge Kataafa as king, you have agreed -to refuse to stand with the other consuls to uphold that decision. The -eagle,” he added, “is a coveted decoration.” - -The consul blushed with pleasure and smilingly nodded his fat head -vigorously. - -Having eaten his breakfast and packed up sufficient clothes to take -with him in the “Talofa,” the count strolled to the store. Klinger -having been up all night was yet asleep in his office. The count seated -himself on the porch and sent word by one of the natives standing guard -over the freight from the schooner. - -Klinger appeared shortly. - -“You did a good night’s work, I see,” said the count. - -Klinger nodded sleepily. - -“Has Captain Scott a white man in his crew?” the count asked. - -“Yes, of course. Stump,” the manager replied, opening wide his eyes. “I -remember now I didn’t see him on the schooner last night.” - -“What does this Stump look like?” the count asked. Klinger described -him accurately. - -“That’s the very man,” the count exclaimed in alarm. “He deserted the -schooner and tried to swim to the American war-ship. I picked him out -of the water nearly drowned, and he slept at the Tivoli Hotel last -night. He’s now loose in Ukula, and may spoil everything unless we can -stop his tongue.” - -Klinger, however, did not seem greatly alarmed. - -“It’s odd that Scott didn’t speak of it, but I’m sure he can do no -harm,” he replied quietly. “Stump is a peaceful, simple soul. Hasn’t -sense enough to know how to harm anybody except himself. We are sure -to get the arms to Kataafa, and the ‘black’ boys are now at Vaileli -plantation.” - -“What are you going to do with these more or less empty boxes?” the -count suddenly asked, tapping upon them with his cane, apparently -satisfied over the matter of Stump. - -“Leave them right here until I again hear from you,” Klinger replied. -“They’ll arouse every one’s curiosity and divert attention from the -‘Talofa.’” - -The count nodded. “But not without a guard,” he said pointedly. “You -must see Carlson and have him order the war-ship’s captain to send a -file of sailors to spend the night at the store. That will help us a -great deal, and,” he added, “don’t be too secret about it.” - -“I understand,” Klinger answered knowingly. - -“I’ll be off in the ‘Talofa’ this forenoon,” the count said, glancing -out on the bay. “There doesn’t seem to be much breeze, yet it will be -enough, I dare say, for the ‘Talofa’ to clear the entrance reefs.” - -The count was on the point of taking his departure. “Whoever comes -ashore with the sailor guard should thoroughly understand what is -expected of his men,” he continued. - -Klinger reassured him, and as he watched the commanding figure of the -count disappear down the road, the manager smiled in perfect enjoyment. -“They didn’t make any mistake when they sent him to Kapua,” he -exclaimed admiringly. - -Several hours later Klinger watched the “Talofa” beat cleverly against -a light head wind out of the harbor. He watched the swift schooner, -under a full spread of canvas, sail to the eastward until the point of -Matautu, with its high cliffs, shut her off from view. - -“So Stump’s deserted that old pirate Scott at last,” he said to -himself amusedly. “When thieves fall out,” he quoted. “I wonder -where the simpleton is at this minute.--I rather like him,” he added -thoughtfully, “and if I could find him I’d be inclined to shield him -from that hypocrite of a sea-pirate.” - -A native came briskly along the road advancing toward Klinger, a letter -held out to him. Klinger took it, opened and read. - - “If Stump turns up after I am gone lock him up. I will explain when I - return. - - “SCOTT.” - -Klinger tore the note into small pieces, strewing them on the ground as -he walked rapidly toward the center of the town. - -At the municipal building he stopped. Several native policemen lounged -about on the ground or squatted upon rude wooden benches. - -“Hey, Johnny Upolu!” he called, and a tall, finely muscled native, -attired in a blue cotton lava-lava[14] and helmet, hurriedly drew on -his blue policeman’s coat over his nakedness. - -“You know Stump, mate of the ‘Talofa’?” he said. The chief of the -municipal police smiled knowingly. “He’s been up to mischief and the -consul wants him taken up.” - -Johnny smiled proudly. He was a strong partisan of Kataafa, and was -only too eager to show his friendliness to the papalangi, who were -backing his favorite chief. - -“All right, Missi Klinger,” he replied in a strictly businesslike -voice. “I’ll get him.” - -Klinger smiled his satisfaction and passed on his way. - -At the consulate his reception was none too cordial. Carlson disliked -the ascendency which this manager of a commercial firm had over one -occupying the office of representative of his government, especially as -Klinger made no attempt to soften this evident fact by any “finesse” -whatsoever. Klinger openly accused the consul of being soft-hearted, -and too friendly with the English and Americans. - -“I must ride to Faleula plantation to-night,” Klinger said brusquely -after he had seated himself. “I haven’t had time to unpack and stow -away some valuable cargo just received from the ‘Talofa,’ and I want -a guard of sailors from the war-ship to protect the store during my -absence.” - -Carlson glanced at Klinger in open-eyed surprise. - -“What will come next?” he exclaimed. “Sailors to guard your store from -robbers! Who are the robbers?” - -Klinger shrugged his shoulders contemptuously. - -“Maybe your friends the English and Americans,” he said calmly. “I have -asked you for a guard. I know the business of the firm better than you -do. That’s what I’m paid for.” - -The consul bit his lips in suppressed rage. - -“Is this another one of your tricks,” the consul exclaimed, “to further -mortify me?” He had in mind only too vividly another occasion where -Klinger had demanded sailors to guard his property and then had hoisted -the flag at the municipal flagstaff, telling all the natives that his -country had annexed the islands. The flag remained flying only until -the next mail arrived, when the consul was severely reprimanded by his -government and was forced to haul down the flag and rehoist the Kapuan -ensign in its place. - -“I want about a dozen sailors,” Klinger insisted. “If you need a little -leg stiffening,” he added cruelly, “I don’t mind telling you that Count -Rosen approves, even suggested the action.” Klinger had sized up his -hearer. - -“That puts another aspect on the question,” Carlson exclaimed, much -mollified by the mention of the count’s concurrence. “When do you -require these sailors?” - -“By four o’clock this afternoon,” Klinger replied, “and I forgot to say -I told the chief of police in your name to arrest and hold one Stump, a -deserter from the ‘Talofa.’” - -“Stump! Why, he’s English or American!” Carlson exclaimed alarmedly. -“I’m having enough trouble without borrowing more.” - -“Another suggestion of the count,” Klinger said quietly. “Please send a -written warrant to Johnny Upolu at once.” - -[Illustration: “I WANT ABOUT A DOZEN SAILORS”] - -“Oh, well, then, that’s all right,” the consul replied, again changing -his tone of voice. “The count, Klinger, is a very brilliant diplomat -and I’m sure would not suggest anything which would get me into -trouble.” - -“I dare say,” Klinger said with a smirk. “The difference between you -and the count in diplomacy is that he knows what he wants.” - -Carlson turned very red, but upon second thoughts appeared not to -notice the implied insult. - -With a curt good-morning Klinger took his departure. - -“Why do they send such mountains of ignorance and conceit to manage -our political affairs?” he complained. He little reckoned that a wise -government had sent Carlson to act as a check upon Klinger. The radical -Klinger and the conservative Carlson gave the exact mixture required. - -At exactly four o’clock the sailors arrived. Klinger took aside the -petty officer in charge and in detail laid down for him the course he -was to follow during his absence. - -Then he mounted his little pony and turned its head toward Kulinuu, the -seat of government of the uncrowned king, Kataafa. - -Arriving at the king’s house, he entered and was ceremoniously received. - -Kava was made and all the chiefs were gathered to drink. - -Klinger talked for nearly an hour, explaining and directing. Then he -rose and bade a ceremonious farewell. Accompanied by several mounted -natives he departed, and in the gathering darkness took the trail -leading back of Ukula and toward the eastward, while Faleula, where he -told Carson he was going, lay in exactly the opposite direction. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -AVAO, TAPAU OF UKULA - - -The morning following the arrival of the schooner, Phil and Sydney were -on deck early. The “Talofa” was still at anchor. The canoe barges were -lying alongside the dock at the store of the Kapuan firm. Herzovinian -colors were flying on the schooner. Phil had given his friend a full -account of the perplexing happenings of the night before. - -“If the schooner brought guns where are they now?” Phil asked. - -Sydney shook his head. “Ask me something easier,” he replied. “I’m not -good at conundrums.” - -After morning quarters and drill the midshipmen dressed for a visit -ashore. This was only the second day of their arrival and each was full -of eager interest to explore. Their shipmates poked much good-natured -fun at them for their strenuosity. - -“Hitting the beach before lunch?” the doctor inquired with mock -gravity. “I’m afraid I’ll have to examine your sanity.” - -After landing they walked along the main road toward the Kapuan firm’s -store. As they passed, the portly figure of Klinger could be seen -within the doorway, while on the porch a score or more of large boxes -were displayed to view. A glance at the barges lying at the wooden dock -showed them to be empty. The cargo had been discharged during the night. - -“The ‘Talofa’s’ getting up anchor,” Sydney suddenly exclaimed. - -The schooner’s mainsail had been set and the crew were plainly seen -heaving around the capstan, weighing the anchor. - -“The count is off on his cruise about the islands,” Phil said. “I -wonder,” he added thoughtfully, “if those boxes really do contain arms?” - -“Very likely,” his companion answered, “but come on. You can’t look -through their wooden sides.” - -At the house of Chief Tuamana, Avao met them with a demure smile of -welcome on her comely face. - -“Missi Alice is here,” she cried out to them joyously as she took each -by the hand and led them into the cool shelter under her father’s roof -tree. - -The midshipmen glanced about for Alice. The big room was deserted, but -from behind the tapa curtain came much merry laughter, and finally -Alice appeared dragging with her two very shy young native girls. - -“We’re going to make Kava Fa’a Kapua,”[15] she said as she seated -herself native fashion, “and then we’re going out to ‘Jumping Rock’ for -a swim. If you care to go we shall be delighted to have you join us,” -she told the midshipmen. - -Avao brought out a small piece of kava root, holding it out for Alice -to inspect. - -“I’m the alii,”[16] Alice said. “I’m supposed to judge if the root is -of good quality before the Tapau chews it.” - -“Chews it!” Phil exclaimed. “I thought it was to be a drink.” - -“So it is,” Alice replied, thoroughly enjoying the depth of Phil’s -ignorance of the Kapuan custom. “Avao is the ‘Tapau’; she will chew the -kava root; look!” she exclaimed admiringly. - -The midshipmen turned their eyes toward Avao. Her cheeks were already -bulging as she sat stoically ruminating the root while one of the other -girls fed her from time to time an additional sliver. - -For fully fifteen minutes Avao was busily engaged in reducing the root -to a pulpy mass which finally she held in her hand and then put into -the kava bowl beside her. - -Next came the washing. Pure water was poured carefully over the mass -and Avao daintily cleansed her hands and then gracefully squatted -before the bowl. - -While one girl poured water slowly into the bowl, Avao kneaded the -material vigorously. The liquid soon began to assume a greenish tinge, -and the midshipmen involuntarily shuddered at the idea of drinking the -concoction. - -“Do you know, kava never agrees with me,” Phil said in an aside, in -order not to hurt the feelings of their native friends, “especially in -the morning.” - -“I never could see anything in it either,” Sydney answered. “I’d much -prefer a lemonade or a drink of cocoanut milk.” - -Alice overheard the remarks and smiled wickedly. “This is probably the -last real cup of kava you’ll get,” she said. “The chewing has gone -out of fashion since the fomais[17] have taught the Kapuans about the -spread of germs. We got this up especially for your benefit.” - -“It was awfully good of you,” Phil acknowledged miserably, “but really -I don’t believe I need any kava this morning.” - -Avao was now working a strainer[18] to and fro in the liquid. The grace -of her motions was delightful to see and elicited much admiration from -the midshipmen. Finally, with a last fleck of the strainer, she dropped -it into the bowl and clapped her shapely hands. - -All present took up the clapping. It was the sign that the kava was -ready to be served. - -The midshipmen dreaded the ordeal. “I feel like a kid about to be given -a dose of bad medicine,” Sydney whispered. - -One of the attendant girls then arose with “hipu”[19] in hand. She -held the cocoanut shell cup over the bowl, while Avao squeezed the -liquid into it from the strainer. The midshipmen were amazed at the -charm and grace in every movement. Each time the strainer was squeezed -the cup bearer swung the cup in a circle. She then faced about and, -with the cup held at the level of her dainty chin, directed her dark -eyes toward Phil. - -“I’m it,” he groaned. - -Alice, bubbling over with mischief, exclaimed: “A cup of kava for Mr. -Perry.” - -The next second the cup of greenish liquid, after a graceful underhand -curve, as the girl bent her knees, was held before the disconsolate lad. - -“Cheer up,” Sydney exclaimed. “Hold your nose and shut your eyes and -she’ll give you something to make you wise.” - -Phil took the cup gingerly. To his horror it was nearly full to the -brim. - -“Must I drink it all?” he asked Alice nervously. - -“If you don’t, I am afraid Avao will look for another ‘felinge,’” she -replied teasingly. - -“Count for me, Syd,” Phil said, “and when you see the folks at home, -say I died game.” - -He calmly swallowed the contents without drawing breath, and handed the -cup back to the girl. - -“Thanks awfully, no more just now,” he said laughing, happy the ordeal -was over. - -“What’s it like?” Sydney asked. - -“More like drinking slate pencils than anything else I can imagine.” - -Sydney drank his, shuddering slightly at the bitter taste. All the -others, including Alice, drank as if they thoroughly enjoyed it. - -“You get accustomed to it,” Alice explained. “The Kapuans drink it as -we do coffee or tea.” - -After kava was over the lads found that native ponies had been provided -by Avao, and within a half hour the cavalcade started. A dozen or more -of Kapuan men brought up the rear on foot, carrying many kinds of fruit -and edibles wrapped in banana leaves. - -Alice and Avao led the procession, while the midshipmen came next. They -trotted along a sylvan path for about a mile, then in single file -through the wet “bush.” - -“It was lucky for us we happened along,” Phil said to Alice as they -halted to admire a great banyan tree close to the path. - -“It was only by accident I am here, too,” she answered. “Tuamana, -Avao’s father, and all the chiefs loyal to Panu, are in council at the -‘Jumping Rock.’ The girls are taking their feast to them.” - -“Oh!” Phil exclaimed. “Maybe they will not be glad to see us.” - -“The Kapuan is always delighted to have papalangi at his feasts,” Alice -assured him; “especially as they know the Americans are very friendly -to Panu’s claim to the throne. The Kataafa chiefs might not be so -cordial if we dropped in on them.” - -The two midshipmen were amazed at the sight when the place chosen for -the council had been reached. A score or more of warriors were found -squatting in the grass near the huge rock over which the Vaisaigo -stream plunged. A large pool of dark water below the falls was thus -kept filled, and where the solid stream curved and fell the blackness -was changed to white foam and iridescent spray. - -They found the council was over. The business having been finished the -chiefs were ready to eat and then after a time bathe in the deep pool -beneath them. - -Tuamana made the midshipmen and Alice sit beside him, and all the best -things to eat were pressed upon the visitors. - -“I’m glad there’s no more kava,” Phil said in an aside to Alice. - -After the feast, consisting of roast young pig, yams, breadfruit, -roast chicken and many kinds of tropical fruit, Tuamana called Avao -to him. The father talked to his daughter fully fifteen minutes. Phil -noticed that both were serious and solemn. Alice had meanwhile risen -and wandered away with two of her Kapuan girl friends, to gather the -many variegated flowers and leaves so plentiful in the virgin forests. -The lads, left to themselves, eyed in wonder the warrior chiefs seated -now in small groups; some were motionless, a look of deep contemplation -upon their intelligent bronze faces, while others talked, but with the -same solemn expression. Each wore the fighting head-dress of human -hair, standing above a band of gleaming pearl-shell knobs clasped -around the forehead. In the center of this marvelous, barbaric creation -of a head-dress and to add picturesqueness and color, a bunch of long -red feathers plucked from the boatswain bird waved in the breeze, while -in the middle of each forehead, reflecting the sunlight as it filtered -through the dense foliage above them, was a small mirror. About their -necks were hung necklaces of the scarlet pandanus fruit. About their -waists and hanging half-way to their knees were tapa and mats of finely -woven grass. Below this their only covering, the indigo tattooing, was -visible above their knees. Every warrior when he reaches manhood must -submit to the old women tattooers; they cover the would-be warrior with -their intricate designs from the waist to the knee, and to refuse to be -tattooed is considered by a Kapuan a crime against manhood. - -Many of the warrior chiefs, as they arose to cool themselves in the -icy cold waters of the Vaisaigo, stopped and shook hands with the two -officers. - -“They seem to think there is a tacit understanding between them and -ourselves,” Phil said to Sydney as one chief after shaking hands -brought his “fui”[20] to his shoulder as if it were a gun and took aim -at an imaginary enemy. “I wonder if there is,” he added thoughtfully. -“That chap’s sign language either means you are going to furnish him a -gun, or that he and we are going gunning together after the same human -game.” - -Avao, after being dismissed by her father, at once took Phil and Sydney -by the hand, as is the Kapuan custom, and led the lads to the side of -the pool. - -In a few minutes the deep pool was a lively scene; men and women were -jumping one after another from the top of the rock, full thirty feet, -into the deep pool below. - -After one or two jumps the lads decided that to watch the sport -was more interesting than engaging in it. The icy cold water was -deliciously refreshing but soon chilled them to the marrow. - -“I see the reason for the plentiful use of cocoanut oil,” Sydney -chattered as they donned their clothes. “The natives are in the water -most of the time, either in the ocean or in one of these mountain -streams, and the water flows off them like off a duck’s back. We with -our unoiled dry skins get the chill from evaporation.” - -“I’d rather have the chill,” Phil replied, shivering to keep Sydney -company. - -“What is the reason of this meeting, anyway?” Sydney asked. “Has it a -meaning?” - -“I have an idea,” Phil said, “that Tuamana was displeased with Avao -for bringing us. Did you notice that as soon as Alice Lee was led away -by her two girl friends, the chief called Avao to him? I think he was -laying down the law to her.” - -“I think you must be wrong, Phil,” Sydney replied shaking his head. -“Every one seemed so glad to see us.” - -“The Kapuans are noted as the most generous and friendly nation in -the world,” Phil returned. “It’s almost a religion with them. To hurt -a stranger’s feelings by rebuke or inhospitality is something rarely -known to have happened. But come on,” he ended. “I see our party -beckoning us.” - -They clambered up the side of the ragged rock and were soon where their -ponies were tethered. - -Alice called the midshipmen to her side. - -“It’s unfortunate for you that we came,” she said, but her eager, -excited face showed no sign of sorrow. - -“I thought so,” Phil exclaimed. “What is it, though?” - -“The council has prepared a ‘tonga-fiti’[21] on the Kapuan firm, and -you two American officers having been here at the council, Klinger will -not believe you are innocent.” Alice could not keep back her joyful -smile. “Klinger will probably say you put the Kapuans up to it.” - -“What are they going to do?” both lads asked in one breath. - -“They have heard of the landing of the guns for Kataafa from the -‘Talofa,’” she replied excitedly, “and to-night they are going to break -into the store if necessary, open the boxes and seize the guns. They -say that this is the only way they can overcome the great advantage in -warriors that Kataafa has over Panu, their choice for king. Then they -are to turn the guns over to Judge Lindsay.” - -“Gee!” Phil exclaimed. “What a box for us to be in. Who told you? -Avao?” he asked. - -Alice nodded. “Tuamana gave her a severe scolding and told her to say -nothing, but of course you know women, and Kapuan women in particular, -would die in keeping a secret, so she confided in all of us while you -were in swimming.” - -“What are we going to do?” Sydney asked after they had mounted their -ponies and were riding slowly down the steep bush trail. - -“I wish Avao had kept her secret,” Phil replied, annoyed. “Knowing -this we must take our information to Commander Tazewell at once; but -don’t say anything before Miss Alice. She is too thoroughly Kapuan to -understand our reasons.” - -Sydney readily agreed. - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -O’NEIL’S OPINION - - -“Say, Jack,” Bill Marley exclaimed, as he and Boatswain’s Mate Jack -O’Neil, both sailormen from the U. S. S. “Sitka,” ambled slowly along -the beach road of Ukula, “where are we going to get off in this row -everybody seems to think is going to start when Judge Lindsay tells -Kataafa to climb down from his tinsel throne and take to the tall -timbers?” - -Jack O’Neil posed before his shipmates as an oracle upon Kapuan -affairs. He had survived the wreck of an American war-ship in the great -hurricane nearly ten years before, and had lived in Ukula many months -until relief ships could come from the United States. - -“I don’t just know, Bill,” he replied thoughtfully. “These Herzovinians -always did mix things up so that it was only a guess what was going -to happen next. You see,” he added confidentially, “the Kapuan firm -has annexed about all the land along the coast, and in the valleys -of this and other islands, and owning all this land they don’t like -to ‘kowtow’[22] to a brown king with a topknot of false hair on his -cranium, and a grass mat slung careless like about his waist line. -Kapua for the Herzovinians is what they want, and they’ve had that idea -stuck in their heads for a good many years.” - -“Well,” replied Marley, “what do we care? Haven’t we got enough land on -our hands? Look at all the bad lands out west there in the states which -we haven’t got no use for, and then all the land in the Philippines -that our little brown brother is fighting us to keep for himself. Ain’t -we got enough trouble without stirring it up way down here south of the -equator?” - -“What do you know about politics?” O’Neil exclaimed severely. “Come -on into Mary Hamilton’s shack, and we’ll get her to ‘buscar’[23] some -nice green cocoanuts, and I’ll tell you a little Kapuan history that’ll -put you wise to this intricate situation. I can only tell you, Bill,” -O’Neil added playfully, “but I can’t give you the brains to understand.” - -Marley smiled good-naturedly. “I don’t know as you’re so all fired -smart,” he replied. “When I’ve wasted as many years as you have, I -suppose I’ll know almost as much as you do.” Marley was nearly ten -years O’Neil’s junior. - -“Go to it!” O’Neil exclaimed admiringly. “You ain’t entirely dead, are -you? Don’t be a music box all your life, Bill, that’s my advice to -you. Play yourself sometimes. There’s nothing like a little friendly -argument to keep the brain well greased up. Now you know, or you ought -to know at any rate, that a gun that ain’t worked every day will get -all gummed up. That’s the way it is with our brains if they ain’t -worked. I was afraid,” he ended, “your head had drawn a sweetbread -instead of a brain.” - -Mary Hamilton welcomed them to her home. Both sailormen apparently -were old friends of this accomplished woman. In spite of her name she -was not a “papalangi.” Old Captain Alexander Hamilton, whose record -in the islands was good but not entirely spotless, had taken Mele to -wife some fifteen years before, and not many years after this happy -event, sailed his small trading schooner out of Ukula harbor never -to return. Some had said that “Alex” was living happily in the Fiji, -but Mele, or Mary, as most every one called her, believed that he and -his vessel had met disaster in a big storm at sea. Mary had finally -remarried, this time to a chief of her own race. Captain Hamilton had -owned considerable property in Ukula, all of which had come to Mary; -so despite being a widow, she had been sought by many powerful chiefs. -Mary was a linguist. She spoke both English and Herzovinian fluently -and was as popular with one faction as with the other. - -“How’s it for a couple of cocoanuts?” O’Neil asked. - -Mary nodded graciously and called loudly in Kapuan for the fruit. - -Several girls came shyly forward and hospitably attended to the -comforts of their guests. Mary sat on her mat facing the squatting -sailors, and smilingly watched them quench their tropical thirst with -the refreshing juice, drunk from the green cocoanut itself, out of -a small hole cut dexterously in the soft shell by two strokes from a -heavy knife used for the purpose. - -“Mary and I can tell you lots of history of these islands that never -has been written in books,” O’Neil said proudly after he had smacked -his lips and thrown the empty cocoanut shell among others in the corner -of the house. “Mary’s present husband was fighting once with Kataafa -against the Herzovinians. How’s he going to fight this time?” O’Neil -asked suddenly. - -Mary put a shapely finger to her lips. - -“I figure that he’s got to go against his old chief. Mary Hamilton’s -husband never could fight against the Americans.” O’Neil’s voice was -persuasively commanding. - -Mary shook her head and patted her sailor friend affectionately on the -shoulder. - -“Fa’a Kapua,” she replied. “Husband maybe fight on one side, wife still -stay friend with other side.” - -“That’s the Kapuan custom all right,” O’Neil hastened to say, “but -that ain’t the kind of friends we’re looking for. We want you and the -old man too on our side; for, Mary, we’re going to be on the right -side. We ain’t looking for land. We ain’t swiping native property and -refusing to give it back. But hold on,” he added interrupting himself, -“I promised to give Bill here a lesson in Kapuan history. You correct -me, Mary,” he said, “if I wander from the truth. In spinning yarns -these days if you just tell things that happened and don’t invent some, -your audience’ll go to sleep before your eyes. - -“The king that just passed over to the ‘happy fishing grounds,’” O’Neil -began, “was a long time ago, when first made king, no friend of the -Herzovinians, so they kidnapped him and sent him into exile. A native -chief named Samasese was put in the ‘chair’ by our friends in the -Kapuan firm, and this same chief Kataafa then declared war on Samasese. -Kataafa licked the king’s army through the town from one end to the -other. I saw the fight;--went along with ’em, and had to make a hundred -yards in ten seconds flat, getting to cover when the Herzovinian -war-ship opened fire on Kataafa’s warriors. If she hadn’t come to -Samasese’s help, Kataafa would have run him clean over the point of -Kulinuu into the sea. - -“Those certainly were warm times. Eh, Mary?” O’Neil exclaimed -enthusiastically. “We had a skipper named O’Malley in command of the -old corvette ‘Wyoming.’ Stevenson, the great writer, was living then in -that big bungalow you can see on the hill back of the town, and he got -lots of good material for his books out of the way O’Malley handled the -situation. - -“O’Malley didn’t care who was king, only he didn’t cotton to the -high-handed way the Herzovinians were running things and asking -nobody’s consent,” the sailor continued, his Irish blue eyes sparkling -with joy at the remembrance. “Samasese was ‘treed’ at Kulinuu and -Kataafa with several thousand warriors was surrounding him. There was -an American beachcomber named Blacklock who owned a house just outside -of the Samasese lines. One night a party of natives from Kulinuu broke -into his house to get some grub to eat. They scared Blacklock nearly -into a fit. The same night he got on board the ‘Wyoming’ and told -a horrible story of brutality to O’Malley. The American commander -landed his sailors the next day and encamped at the outraged house. -The ‘Wyoming’ anchored in a position to shell the Samasese forts at -Kulinuu. O’Malley, then, all day long wagged his Irish tongue as if it -was mounted on a swivel and run by a six cylinder gasoline motor. All -Ukula said that at sunrise the next day, unless Samasese dug out of -Kulinuu O’Malley sure was going to use the king’s camp for his annual -target practice. - -“The next morning there wasn’t anything alive at Kulinuu except dogs -and pigs. Samasese skinned out during the night, and was landed by a -Herzovinian war-ship’s boats down the coast there about six miles.” - -O’Neil took a deep breath and brushed an insistent fly off his -forehead. “Kataafa wasn’t a bit frightened at Herzovinia,” he continued -admiringly; “he’s a great fighter, Bill, I can tell you, and if we -get into a row with him there’s going to be something doing. Kataafa -then got a good start and went up against Samasese good and hard. A -sad thing for old ‘Kat.’ Some of his warriors tore down a couple of -painted Herzovinian flags and used them for ‘lava-lavas.’ The outraged -commodore swore vengeance and declared war on the spot. Kataafa had to -run and get his men into a fort before the Herzovinian sailors attacked -him. He was just about snugly fixed when a war-ship came trailing along -close to the reef to bombard this fort and the native town all around -it. Just behind this ship came O’Malley’s ship, the ‘Wyoming,’ and the -game old Irishman was on the bridge. He wore riding leggins, a sign -that he was going to surprise somebody, and an angelic smile was spread -all over his face. When the Herzovinian ship stopped and began to lower -her gun ports and run out her guns for business, we followed suit. I -thought we’d be on the reef, sure. O’Malley ran the ‘Wyoming’ inside -the other war-ship and hung there between her and Kataafa’s fort. - -“The other ship made all kinds of foxy moves, but O’Malley covered the -plate all the time. - -“It was nearly sunset when we heard a voice pipe up from the other -ship. Everybody knew it was the commodore who was talking. - -“‘I’m going to open fire on my enemy in that town yonder in about five -minutes. Kindly chase yourself.’” O’Neil glanced at Mary for a few -seconds. “Those weren’t the exact words, maybe, but that was what was -meant, anyway. - -“Captain O’Malley’s smile got bigger. He took off his white helmet and -waved it encouragingly. - -“‘Go ahead,’ he returned. ‘I’m in the front row and have paid for my -ticket. Money won’t be refunded at the box office this time.’” - -“What happened?” Bill Marley exclaimed eagerly. “Did you have a scrap?” - -“Did we have war with Herzovinia ten years ago?” O’Neil asked -contemptuously. “No! of course we didn’t, or even you’d ’a’ heard of it. - -“The other ship gave up the game at sunset and we followed her back to -Ukula,” O’Neil continued after Marley’s interruption had been settled. - -“A few days later the commodore tried a new stunt: to disarm the -natives this time. The Herzovinians landed at night on the big -plantation of Vaileli. The Kataafa warriors got news that they were -coming from some women in Ukula. I’ll bet,” he said insinuatingly, -“that Mary Hamilton can tell you who the women were.” - -Mary smiled. “I was blamed,” she replied. “My second husband was with -Kataafa and I arrived a few hours before the sailors landed.” - -O’Neil nodded. “Yes,” he said, “and there was an American who also was -accused by the other side of carrying the news. Anyway, the Kataafa -warriors attacked the Herzovinian sailors. Surprised them, killed about -twenty and wounded twice as many. It was an awful shock to us all, and -showed us we had been playing too close to a playful volcano. Such a -thing had never occurred before. We thought the natives would not dare -to raise their hands against the whites. - -“I was on board another ship then; the ‘Wyoming’ had gone home to be -paid off,” O’Neil continued after an impressive silence. “The worst of -it all was that the heads were cut off the poor sailors. It gave us -all cold shivers. We had thought the Kapuans were just good-natured -children, and we found them heartless, brutal savages.--Excuse me, -Mary,” he apologized. “I’m not inventing now. That’s the plain truth. -When your people get really excited you ain’t civilized. You’re a lot -of Apache Indians on the war-path. - -“I don’t know what would have happened if the hurricane hadn’t come at -that time. We found ourselves all on the beach and our ships wrecks. -Over a hundred or more sailors were drowned, and the natives, both -Kataafa and Samasese, came and risked their lives many times to save -us out there clinging to the wreckage. Mighty near every man saved -owed his life to the natives. That sort of patched things up. We lived -ashore for several months, and every one was as friendly as you please. -You wouldn’t have known there ever had been a war. - -“Lots of things, I reckon,” he added finally, “have happened since I -have been away, but what makes me laugh is to see the Herzovinians -falling all over themselves to make friends with this Kataafa, and we, -who were his best friends then, falling all over ourselves to call him -all the bad names we can think of. - -“It all goes to prove, Bill, and you can take this from me without any -sugar,” O’Neil exclaimed, “that friendships among natives are only good -business deals. There ain’t no sentiment mixed up in it. - -“What’s all that row about out there?” O’Neil suddenly exclaimed, -rising and going in haste to look out. He saw several native policemen -grasping firmly a thin white man who was protesting vigorously. - -“That’s Missi Stump,” Mary Hamilton cried aghast. “What is Johnny Upolu -arresting him for?” - -“I’m going to find out,” O’Neil said determinedly. He did not like -to see a white man in the clutch of the natives. To O’Neil’s mind it -lowered all the whites in the eyes of the Kapuans to permit such a -thing as this. - -Before Johnny Upolu and his two assistants could recover from the -onslaught, the big sailor, followed closely by one a little smaller -but as impetuous, had attacked their captive, and the policemen were -sitting in the sandy road. - -Johnny scowled darkly. A crowd had gathered, and like all crowds the -Kapuans at once sided against the officers of the law, and were making -insulting remarks to the discomfited chief of police. - -“What do you mean by arresting an innocent man?” O’Neil exclaimed when -Johnny Upolu had risen to his feet. “What’s this island coming to, -anyway? Now, you just beat it.” - -Johnny coaxed a smile upon his face. - -“Got a warrant,” he said, producing a large certificate and showing it -to O’Neil and the crowd. - -O’Neil glanced contemptuously at the official paper. He could not read -a word, but he recognized the design of the seal. - -“Take that out to Kataafa at Kulinuu,” O’Neil said. “That don’t go -here. You’ve got to have either a lion or another breed of bird on your -warrant to do business with us.” - -O’Neil considered the matter settled. His arm linked under that of -Stump, they reëntered the house. The chief of police did not follow. -An American sailorman on liberty was, to his mind, a dangerous object -to meddle with. It was a kind of explosive mixture which might go off -upon contact. - -O’Neil had never met Stump, but he sized him up as accurately as if he -had been personally acquainted. - -“You’re from the ‘Talofa,’” O’Neil said as Mary called for more -cocoanuts and Stump composed his ruffled garments. “Why ain’t you in -her now? She’s off on a pleasure cruise with a foreign nobleman.” - -Stump wagged his head knowingly. “The ‘Talofa’ ain’t the breed to go on -any pleasure cruise,” he answered. “‘Bully’ Scott’s got something on -board that he didn’t just like to put ashore in Ukula. I’ve been hiding -in the ‘bush.’ I saw her go, so I started to find our consul to get my -rights.” - -“Who’s been abusing you except Johnny Upolu?” O’Neil asked. “Your -countenance does look as if it had met a hard round object. Who did it?” - -“‘Bully’ Scott,” Stump replied bitterly. “But I’m quit of him now. -He’ll never get me on his ship again if I can help it.” - -“Stop swinging all over the compass,” O’Neil said rebukingly, “and -steady down on some course. We want to hear what you got to say.” - -Stump laughed a mirthless laugh. “That’s what I did,” he exclaimed. -“I steered her into Ukula when old man Scott thought he was heading -straight for Saluafata. Fixed the compass, you see. Oh, it’s a great -trick.” - -O’Neil began to understand. “So Scott didn’t intend coming in here last -night?” he asked. - -“Not he,” Stump declared joyfully. “He was loaded with ‘blacks’ and -guns.” - -“That’s where you’re dead wrong, then,” O’Neil explained, “for he has -landed everything and a foreign count has hired the schooner.” - -Stump gazed in wonder at the speaker. - -“You don’t seem to know ‘Bully’ Scott,” he said. “Them guns are in the -schooner and he’s going to land them to-night at Saluafata.” - -“Come with me,” O’Neil commanded taking Stump by the arm. “You ought to -know if any one does. What we’ve got to do is to put our captain wise -at once. Is Scott an Englishman?” O’Neil asked. - -“Not he!” Stump exclaimed. “He’s an American. Comes from ‘Frisco’; and -the ‘Talofa’ was stolen at Hongkong from a Chinaman.” - -As they passed Klinger’s store, Stump stopped to eye the boxes still -piled on the porch of the store. - -He shook his head as he continued behind the two men-of-war’s men. -“Nope, them guns must be on the schooner,” he said to himself. - -At the landing they met the two midshipmen, who had returned from their -picnic and were waiting to return to the “Sitka.” - -O’Neil explained the situation. - -Johnny Upolu had followed his liberated captive at a safe distance, and -now seeing the two officers, respectfully approached, holding out the -warrant to Phil, and indicating Stump with his finger. - -The lad examined it carefully. - -“What has he done?” Phil inquired. “This warrant must be respected, -anyway.” He turned to Stump. “I’ll see the captain at once, and you -being an American, he will ask to have you released if you have -committed no crime.” - -Johnny Upolu put his hand on the prisoner’s shoulder and led him -quietly toward the jail. A few yards had been traveled when Stump -stopped and called. - -“May I speak to you a moment, sir, in private?” - -Phil joined him, and the policeman moved away a few feet. - -“Keep these here things for me,” he said. “You can show ’em to your -skipper.” - -Phil received a package of soiled letters and put them into his pocket. - -Upon arrival on board the midshipmen went at once to Commander -Tazewell’s cabin. They found him deep in thought. - -“I have just left the consul’s house,” the commander said after waving -the lads to seats. “He tells me all the natives believe that the guns -have been landed. The Herzovinian consul a few days ago said he would -help to prevent a war, and to-day he writes to the American and English -consul that he must reserve his decision until Judge Lindsay has given -his judgment. Kataafa was summoned by Judge Lindsay to appear before -him at one o’clock to-day and he deliberately waited two hours before -he appeared, a Kapuan way of showing his independence. It all looks -ominous,” he added ruefully. - -Phil began at once to tell of the native council at Jumping Rock and -the “tonga-fiti” decided for that night. He also called in O’Neil, who -had been waiting outside the cabin, and that worthy told in picturesque -language the story of Stump. - -“Here are some letters this man Stump gave me, and said I could show -them to you, sir,” Phil said after O’Neil had completed his narrative. - -Commander Tazewell examined the much soiled and torn correspondence, -while the lads and O’Neil waited in silent interest to learn of their -purport. - -“These corroborate the very thing I have been anxious to prove,” -Commander Tazewell exclaimed joyfully. “Scott’s a full fledged -American. He cleared from Suva in the Fiji under the American flag. -There’s the paper,” handing to Phil an English colonial document. -“What’s this?--a clipping from an English paper,” he added wonderingly. -“Schooner ‘Ta-Li’ stolen by a Yankee pirate.” - -“Stump said Captain Scott had stolen the ‘Talofa’ in Hongkong,” O’Neil -said quietly. - -Commander Tazewell glanced quickly over the remaining letters. - -“Stump has brought us the evidence too late,” he said disappointedly, -spreading out a letter on his desk. “The guns are paid for,” he read -aloud. “Godfried and Company, our agents, will load them upon demand -from you. Remember, you take them to Saluafata at night and send word -to me on arrival.” Commander Tazewell stopped reading, and gazed off -wistfully. “That was from Klinger to Scott. He’ll be unloading them -to-night,” he added, “unless they are already in the Kapuan firm’s -store. If I’d had these letters this morning, I’d have sunk the -‘Talofa’ before I would have permitted her to leave the harbor, foreign -flag and all, until after I had given the vessel a thorough search.” - - - - -CHAPTER X - -RUMORS OF WAR - - -Commander Tazewell and the midshipmen dined that evening with Mr. Lee -and his daughters. - -“The evidence is all in, commander,” the American consul said as the -party sought the cool sea breeze on the “lanai,”[24] facing the harbor. -“The chief justice will probably render his decision in the morning.” - -Tazewell expressed his gratification. - -“And the Herzovinian consul?” he asked. “Does he still refuse to help -to prevent a war?” - -Mr. Lee’s face became grave. - -“The three consuls held a meeting this afternoon after you had gone,” -he said in reply. “The English consul and I unconditionally agreed to -support the judge’s choice. Mr. Carlson seemed ill at ease. He could -not be made to give a direct answer on any question, and all of a -sudden he declared he had an important engagement and bolted from the -room. We saw that he was under a serious mental strain.” - -“I see,” Commander Tazewell said quietly. “Have you an idea what the -decision will be?” he asked. - -Mr. Lee remained silently in thought for a moment. “Personally no, -but my confidants among the natives all say Judge Lindsay is against -Kataafa. I know the judge to be an honorable and unbiased man,” he -added in defense of his friend. “That we Americans are inclined in -our sympathies for Panu would have no influence with him at all. This -unimpeachable testimony of the demand made some years ago by Herzovinia -and Kataafa’s recent discourtesy to the court in keeping the judge -waiting, besides practically refusing to agree to abide by the judge’s -decision, may influence a judgment against him.” - -“Then Carlson must have received instructions to uphold the judge’s -decision, only in case it is favorable to Kataafa,” the commander said. -“Now that it appears to be going against him, he refuses to stand with -you and your British colleague.” - -Mr. Lee nodded his head. “That seems to be the one possible solution.” - -Commander Tazewell had given the consul that morning a full account of -the “Talofa.” Now he brought up the subject of the meeting of the Panu -warriors and their “tonga-fiti.” - -“I had at first thought to advise Tuamana against any action by the -Panu warriors,” Commander Tazewell said, “but on second thoughts I -decided it was better to keep my hands off and trust it to you. If -those boxes landed from the ‘Talofa’ do contain guns, they ought to be -seized, but not by natives, even though they say they will turn them -over to the judge.” Mr. Lee nodded his agreement with the sentiment. - -“As soon as I got your note telling me of the ‘tonga-fiti,’” Mr. Lee -replied, “I went at once to Tuamana. I advised him against action. You -see, commander,” Mr. Lee declared earnestly, “a forcible entry into -the Kapuan firm’s store will bring the Herzovinian sailors ashore to -protect their property.” - -“Good. I’m glad you saw Tuamana,” Commander Tazewell assured him. “And -he agreed to carry out your wish?” he asked. - -“He listened very patiently and seemed to agree,” Mr. Lee said. “Then -he told me that he now knew the guns were not at the store, but still -on the ‘Talofa’ and were to be landed to-night at Saluafata.” - -“That is what this man Stump also claims,” the commander exclaimed. -“By the way, thank you for your promptness in having the poor fellow -released. O’Neil has him in charge on board the ‘Sitka.’” - -While the consul and the commander discussed the affairs of the -nations, the young people had gone to the landing, where O’Neil had -brought the sailing launch, its sails spread and flapping in the gentle -breeze. - -Miss Lee had brought her banjo and Avao, who joined them, held an -Hawaiian “ukalele,” a small guitar with only three strings. As the sail -filled and the launch gathered way, their young voices charmed the -night with a variety of plaintive Kapuan songs. Several canoes with -both men and women natives, paddling lazily across the bay, joined in -the songs. It seemed like fairyland to the midshipmen. - -They sailed around the men-of-war in turn, serenading; then shaped -their course for Kulinuu Point on the western side of Ukula. - -“What do you know new?” Phil asked Alice during a lull in the music. - -“That the guns are to be landed from the ‘Talofa’ at Saluafata -to-morrow, and that Kataafa leaves Kulinuu with all his people -to-night,” she replied. - -“Where did you hear this?” he asked wonderingly. - -“Avao told me, but every one in Ukula knows it,” she answered. “There’s -no difficulty learning secrets. No secrets are kept. The difficulty is -to recognize a secret from a trick.” - -“What do you mean?” Phil inquired, mystified. - -Alice laughed lightly thrumming the cords of the “ukalele” Avao had -relinquished. - -“When you have a secret which you know will be found out before you -can act,” she explained, “why, you deliberately spread a lot of rumors -which will confuse your enemies. I have heard that the arms were to -be landed at Vaileli, and that Klinger had said he was going there. -That Kataafa was going to Saluafata and also Melie. That the arms were -already in Kulinuu. That the arms were on the Herzovinian war-ship and -would be given to Kataafa at Saluafata to-morrow, and that the arms -were in the boxes on the porch of the Kapuan firm’s store.” - -“Well,” Phil exclaimed, “that is rather confusing. And you decided that -the arms would be landed in Saluafata?” - -Alice nodded. “I was all this afternoon at the ‘lookout’ on Mission -Hill,” she said. “I saw the ‘Talofa’ far out on the horizon, her hull -invisible, only the top of her masts in sight. With this breeze she -could have gone out of sight. She’s waiting for darkness.” - -“And Kataafa is leaving Kulinuu to-night?” Phil asked. - -“I got that from Mary Hamilton,” she answered. “Klinger’s wife is from -Saluafata. Her father is the chief of that village. She came to Ukula -this morning from the Vaileli plantation where Klinger ordinarily -lives. She left in a canoe for Saluafata.” - -Phil gazed in wonder at the slim girl beside him. “You’re a marvel,” -he exclaimed admiringly. - -Alice smiled. “I love to work things out,” she acknowledged. “You men -seem so incapable, while the motives of the natives are really so easy -to follow.” - -The boat was sailing near Kulinuu Point. Phil glanced across the -intervening water. - -“Let’s land and walk home,” he said to Alice. All agreed readily. - -A passing canoe was called alongside the deep draft launch and the -passengers quickly transferred. - -“All right, O’Neil,” Phil said. “You may return to the ship. We’ll go -back to town on foot.” - -They landed on the pebbly beach and walked across to the main street -leading between the double row of royal palm trees. It was a deserted -village. Every one had departed. - -Avao found an old woman crooning in the corner of a house and asked her -a question. - -The old hag recognized her and turned upon her fiercely. - -At the Kapuan firm’s store, on their way home, the party again -stopped. Avao’s quick eye caught the gleam of metal from the porch. She -deliberately walked forward until a challenge brought her to a stop. -Phil saw a Herzovinian sailor, gun leveled, walk toward the girl, who -was standing stock-still several paces from the steps. - -The challenge had brought several more sailors to the door. Many -natives, living in houses in the surrounding bush, quickly gathered, -and their childish curiosity pressed them forward. Before five -minutes had elapsed a crowd of nearly fifty warriors and maidens were -surrounding the front of the store; and as their number swelled, the -crowd grew more bold and advanced toward the house. The sailors stood -their ground with guns held ready. - -“This is awkward,” Phil exclaimed excitedly to Sydney. “Something’s got -to be done at once or we’ll have the ‘tonga-fiti’ after all. Follow -me.” He advanced, pushing his way through the crowd. The midshipmen -were in uniform, and the natives gave way readily before them. Phil had -almost reached Avao’s side, when a loud report of a rifle discharged -brought him to a stand. Several more shots were then fired in rapid -succession. The natives instantly backed away; but when they found no -one had been hurt they stopped and began talking and gesticulating -wildly. - -Phil seized Avao by the arm and turned quickly back toward the road. - -From out on the water a rocket soared into the sky. - -“Well, of all the mysteries,” Phil exclaimed as they hurried back -toward the consulate. “I wonder if the guns are in that store after -all?” - -At the landing the Herzovinian cutters were beginning to arrive as Phil -and his party passed. They saw a company of sailors with two officers -quickly form and move at double time up the road. - -The lads soon saw Commander Tazewell and the American consul hurrying -toward the town. - -“What has happened?” Commander Tazewell demanded of Phil as they met. - -Phil breathlessly explained. “I suppose the war-ship thought it was -an attack,” he ended. “But why are the guards there at all unless -the guns are in the store and not on board the schooner? Kulinuu is -deserted,” he added. “We landed there and walked home.” - -“Kataafa probably has the guns by now,” Commander Tazewell said to the -consul in a low voice which Phil could barely hear. “Is this a plan to -trick us into committing ourselves before the chief justice’s decision -is rendered?” - -“There’s no need of our going further, commander,” the consul said, -nervously regarding his daughters with a fond eye and fearful of danger -to them. “Come back with me. We can talk more privately.” - -A figure proceeding from the landing was soon recognized as the British -captain. - -He was given a full account of the incident, and appeared very much -relieved. - -“When I heard the shots and the answering rocket from the war-ship,” he -exclaimed, “I at once imagined that Kataafa was attacking Ukula. I have -my men ready and the boats lowered,” he added. “Thought I’d come ashore -to look about first. I was going to camp them in the British consul’s -yard.” - -The party, with the exception of Avao, returned to the American -consulate. The “Tapau,” with an innocent smile and a cheery “Talofa, -Alii,”[25] slipped away by a “bush” trail. - -“What we need, Tazewell,” the British captain declared as the “lanai” -was reached and all were seated quietly, “is information. We must send -out scouts and find out where this Kataafa has gone and what that -fellow Klinger is up to. Our mysterious count,” he added, “is not out -purely for pleasure.” - -“I have been thinking over a plan,” Commander Tazewell replied. -“This Captain Scott is an American citizen and is sailing under the -Herzovinian flag. His mate, Stump, who deserted him, has given us -evidence that he came into Ukula with ‘blacks’ for the Kapuan firm and -guns for Klinger. All circumstances seem to show that we shall find -everything we are searching for at Saluafata. That’s the Herzovinian -port, leased to their government, and I dare not send there to arrest -him. But I can send a party by land to observe and bring us news.” - -“Right-oh!” the British captain agreed. “I think I’ll send my steam -pinnace to fish along the edge of the reef toward Saluafata. There’s -rare fishing there. Have you ever trolled for these big Kapuan bonitos, -using pearl-shell hooks?” he asked. “I have a lieutenant who is keen on -it.” - -Preparations were made at once for an early start on the morrow. -The distance to Saluafata by trail was about fifteen miles, and by -water scarcely ten. A code of signals was decided upon to facilitate -communication between the American land party and the British steam -launch. Mr. Lee took upon himself the supply of ponies. The two -midshipmen and O’Neil were selected by Commander Tazewell to go. - -“I’ll send them openly,” Commander Tazewell said, as the naval officers -rose to take their departure from the consulate; “in uniform, of -course.” - -Alice Lee endeavored in vain to win her father’s permission to go along -with the midshipmen. “I may be able to help them,” she declared. “I -know the trail and speak Kapuan.” - -The midshipmen and O’Neil were on the dock at an early hour the next -day. There they found three intelligent little ponies waiting them. -Phil carried a sketch chart of the road to be taken. - -As they passed through the Matautu district of Ukula, they caught a -glimpse of Alice’s wistful face gazing upon them from the porch of the -consulate. She waved them a good-bye, while all three raised their caps -in return. - -“She’s a plucky girl,” Sydney exclaimed, “but I feel more free without -a girl along. We can’t tell; there may be a chance for a fight before -we get back.” - -O’Neil chuckled. “No fear,” he said. “A Kapuan wouldn’t raise his -finger against a naval officer. Unless,” he added grimly, “these -scheming white traders put them up to it.” - -The trail was none too good for their ponies and the going was slow. At -the village of Tangali they stopped and got a black boy, a laborer on a -near-by plantation, to gather for them a few green cocoanuts. The boy -readily climbed a tall slender tree with the agility of a monkey. - -“All he requires is a tail,” Phil said as the black boy dropped the -fruit into their hands and then came rapidly down to receive his reward. - -At the next village, Paulei, which was deserted, as was the former -town, of all except old women and children, O’Neil pointed out the very -spot where the American Captain O’Malley had tricked the Herzovinian -war-ship in its attempt to bombard the Kataafa warriors nearly a decade -ago. - -“He knew to the king’s taste how to handle a foreigner, and they all -liked him for it too,” he exclaimed admiringly. - -“The Irish have a way with ’em,” Sydney said, smiling broadly. - -“Not at all, sir,” the sailor replied. The joke apparently passed him -by without notice, except for a comical deprecating glance at its -author. “He couldn’t be bluffed and was always on the job. If it hadn’t -been for him the Herzovinian flag would be flying over these islands -to-day.” - -“Maybe it would be a good thing,” Phil said, and Sydney agreed quickly, -to lead O’Neil on. - -“It ain’t the islands, sir; that ain’t what’s making me want to see -the foreigners get left,” O’Neil explained. “It’s the way they go about -trying to get ’em.” - -“I suppose, O’Neil,” Sydney interjected, “that you think it would -have been more gentlemanly and in keeping with the dignity of a great -country to just take them and let the British and Americans like it or -lump it as they pleased.” - -“Exactly so, sir,” O’Neil declared. “That’s the way I figure it ought -to be done.” - -“That’s because you’re Irish, O’Neil,” Phil told him jokingly. “The -Irish always seize the government. When they can’t control it, they’re -against it. The nation that gets these islands,” he added, “desires to -be right before the world. To do so she must have a very good excuse to -seize them. All three nations would be glad to take an option on the -group, but when one appears to be gaining ground, the other two combine -against her.” - -“That’s it exactly, Mr. Perry,” O’Neil exclaimed. “But Herzovinia is -gaining among the natives. Even though they are taking their land, -they are making money for the natives. The Americans and English are -standing in the way of Kapuan prosperity.” - -“If one nation owned these islands by itself, it could make them a -paradise,” Sydney exclaimed enthusiastically. “I have never seen such -magnificent country in my life. It seems a natural garden, and back -there on the mountains,” he added, glancing toward Mount Lautu with its -crater-shaped summit, “they say are the finest and most valuable hard -wood trees in the world.” - -“You may be sure,” O’Neil confided, “Herzovinia is going to get this -island. A statesman, way back in the eighties, wrote that in his -note-book and every one of them ‘savvys’[26] the plan and is pulling -for it. If we just set our eyes on the other island, Kulila, with the -harbor shaped like a shoe, called Tua-Tua, and give up our share in -this one, England would have to pull stakes and get out.” - -Both midshipmen laughed. “We might have known O’Neil would be against -the English,” Sydney said. - -“What has England ever done for the Irish?” O’Neil replied defensively. - - -The three horsemen crossed two fair sized streams, stopping to allow -their ponies to plunge their hot noses deep into the cool mountain -water. From the next hill the harbor of Saluafata opened out before -them. - -“There’s the ‘Talofa,’” Sydney cried joyfully. They searched the ocean -for the steam launch, but the land and trees shut out the view to the -westward. - -“Hark!” O’Neil exclaimed. They listened. From below them the faint -music of singing came up to them. “There’s where the people are, down -there,” he added. - -“War canoes,” O’Neil said pointing. The beach was hidden by the -foliage, but as O’Neil spoke several large canoes had suddenly -appeared, being propelled swiftly alongside the anchored schooner. - -Phil urged his horse onward. - -“Excuse me, sir,” O’Neil exclaimed nervously. “Those glasses you have -there,” indicating a pair of ship’s binoculars Phil wore slung over his -shoulders, “will give us all the information we want without going any -further into the lion’s mouth.” - -Phil gazed upon the sailor in surprise. - -“Do you think there is danger in riding down there?” he asked. - -O’Neil hesitated. “That depends,” he answered thoughtfully. - -“Upon what?” Sydney insisted. - -“Upon what the white men who are fixing this show intend doing,” the -sailor said. - -“We can’t turn back now,” Phil declared. “It would look as if we were -afraid.” - -O’Neil nodded. “I guess you’re right, Mr. Perry,” the boatswain’s mate -replied grimly. He knew from experience the danger in appearing before -an army of armed warriors, who have been keyed to the highest pitch of -savage excitement. - -The three horsemen urged their steeds forward and descended the hill -road leading down to the populous town of Saluafata. - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -HIGH CHIEF KATAAFA - - -Klinger, after leaving Kataafa and his chiefs at Kulinuu, took the -trail leading behind the town of Ukula. He desired if possible to keep -his movements secret, although he felt sure that before long it would -be unnecessary. The movement of the Kataafa warriors by both land and -sea must be seen by the natives of the other faction. - -As he gave his pony his head, he dwelt happily upon the success that -had so far attended his efforts. - -The manager and his native companions stopped at every village en -route. They found the warriors collected ready to hear his words. Then -after he had ridden on, the entire village made ready to follow afoot -or in canoes within the barrier reef. - -It was long past midnight before he reached the village of Saluafata. -His native companions left him, and he entered a large native house -built off by itself overlooking the bay and but a few hundred yards -from the beach. - -A native woman, comely and dignified in European costume, met him at -the door. - -“‘Talofa’s’ not in?” he asked in Kapuan. - -On the table a cold supper was waiting him. After eating, he stood for -several minutes gazing upon the dark waters of the bay. - -“Don’t wake me until the schooner anchors,” he said to the woman who -was then clearing away the remnants of his meal. “My bed ready? I’m -dead sleepy.” - -After Klinger had gone to his room the woman took her master’s clothes -and proceeded to the little stream a few hundred yards up the beach. -There she began to wash the soiled garments. As the day dawned the -settlement commenced to awaken from its slumber. Fishermen launched -their canoes, paddling out to the reef to seek for shell-fish. Native -woman after woman appeared, squatting down in the shallow brook to -cleanse her own and her husband’s slender wardrobe. A babble of musical -voices rose above the noise of the brook and the distant thunder of the -surf on the reef. - -“Missi Klinger come?” asked one woman as she noticed in the early -morning light the clothes being washed by Klinger’s wife. - -Fanua nodded joyfully. She was very proud of being the wife of the -manager of the Kapuan firm. She was a comely woman, much younger than -Klinger, but the first bloom of youth had vanished. There yet remained -a certain charm of movement. Every gesture was full of grace, the -effect of her long training as the Tapau[27] of Saluafata, where, until -Klinger married her, she had led the village in all its dances and -processions. - -The throng of women continued to increase. All plied questions to the -smiling Fanua, who answered them all good-naturedly. - -When would Kataafa arrive? What was going to happen? Had the chief -justice said who was to be king? Could they go ahead and build -their new house? Was there to be war? Would the islands be taken by -Herzovinia? - -The women of Kapua are the source of all gossip. Nothing can be kept -secret from their intelligent intellects. Nor can any of them keep a -secret an instant. It is their stock in trade. As they washed, as they -beat out the tapa cloth, as they wove the sennit string from cocoanut -fiber, as they gathered the thatch for the roofs of their houses, or as -they swept clean their houses and adjoining space, their voices were -always raised to gossip with their nearest neighbors. Nothing missed -their watchful eyes. News travels fast. An incident happens in one -village and in an incredibly short time the news has been passed from -house to house and village to village until the whole island has buzzed -with the knowledge. - -The sun had been up several hours when the “Talofa” crawled slowly -through the narrow entrance to the harbor, between the reefs, and -anchored scarcely a stone’s throw from the shore. - -The rattle of her chain awoke Klinger. He arose at once. Fanua was at -work preparing breakfast. He watched in silence from the window. He -saw a boat lowered and shortly shove off for the beach. It grounded in -front of his house. He waved a greeting. The count and Captain Scott -stepped ashore. - -Fanua welcomed them at the door with the musical Kapuan salutation -“Talofa, Alii,” and then hastened away to finish preparing the -breakfast with her own hands, a duty never entrusted to another. - -“Your wife?” the count asked. Klinger nodded, but his hasty flush told -plainly that the acknowledgment was a slight mortification before this -superior gentleman. - -“I’m here for life,” he replied, as if he deemed it necessary to -explain. “Kapua is no place for a woman of our race to live, and I -needed a companion. I was lonely. Fanua is a queen, in spite of her -brown skin.” - -The count put out his hand in ready sympathy. Klinger took it -gratefully, and no more was said. - -“Did you get that hound, Ben Stump?” Captain Scott asked eagerly after -a short silence. - -Klinger nodded. “The chief of police was after him. He’ll be found -unless he left Ukula.” - -“He took with him some papers,” Scott explained. “I didn’t find it -out until a few minutes before we sailed, and the count would not -wait. Have you any one you can trust to send back to get them? If the -American man-of-war captain reads them before I get clear of these -islands, it’s all over with me and the ‘Talofa.’” - -“We’ll have you clear in short order now,” Klinger encouraged. “Have -you breakfasted?” - -The count and Scott declined to partake of the tempting food set before -them. Klinger ate hurriedly, his wife serving him, while the count -and Scott walked to the door, from whence they looked out upon the -increasingly busy scene. The village of Saluafata was being invaded -from all directions by the followers of Kataafa. They were arriving -by road, long lines of almost naked warriors and half clad women, and -the beach was already crowded with the canoes of those who had come by -water. Each village as it arrived selected its own spot for preparation. - -Klinger soon joined his companions. Such gatherings of the natives were -old stories to both Klinger and Captain Scott, but to the count the -sight was one of absorbing interest. - -Kataafa himself and his more important chiefs were in the “Malae,” or -public square of the village, when the three papalangi arrived there. - -The greeting between the wily old Kapuan rebel and the count was -ceremonial to an extreme. Klinger had previously made it plain that -this “papalangi” was the special ambassador of his great nation beyond -the sea--a nation which was much more powerful than both England and -America put together. - -The would-be king made the count sit next to him, and then the ceremony -of kava drinking was begun. This solemn custom of preparing the root -and mixing the kava can never be dispensed with at any ceremony in -which the Kapuans take part. To omit it would be a grave ceremonial -blunder. - -Kataafa and his important chiefs and their women sat under the -spreading branches of an umbrella tree, whose horizontal boughs covered -with dark green foliage gave shelter from the scorching sun to nearly -two hundred men and women. The warriors sat in serried ranks, close -to their chosen king, while the women fringed the edge of the densely -packed crowd. - -The various villages formed their companies where they had camped -upon arrival, and very soon they could be heard approaching. Faint -singing was heard in the distance, becoming stronger as the groups -advanced. At last the war chant burst out in all its barbaric melody. -The maidens led, two abreast, their Tapau in front, dressed in her most -elaborate creation of fine mats, tapa and girdles of sweet-scented -grass. Her skin, shiny with oil, resembling soft satin, and her locks -polished to the deep bluish black of the raven’s wing. Upon her head -rested grotesquely the Tapau head-dress of human hair and shells of -pearl. Around her throat were string after string of shells and beads. -Following the maidens came the warriors, each carrying a staff to -represent a rifle. - -As each village arrived they danced wildly, keeping time to their -quick, inspiring chant, the women, led by their graceful Tapau, swaying -from side to side in perfect time, while the men brandished their -wooden guns, in pantomime of battle. - -Then the villagers with a sudden burst of throaty sound, resembling -the final roar of a wave dashing upon the reef, deposited their food -offerings and withdrew to their appointed places, from where they would -take part in the great “fono,”[28] called by their candidate for king. - -Count Rosen gazed in undisguised admiration upon this wonderfully -drilled assemblage. All were now sitting immovable on the ground, their -deep lustrous eyes turned in the direction of the inner circle of -chiefs, where sat their calm leader. - -After several minutes of impressive silence a chief rose to his feet -and struck the attitude traditional to the Kapuan of one who wishes -to be heard. He carried a “fui” of white horsehair in his right hand, -while his left rested upon the knob of his orator’s staff. - -He talked for nearly fifteen minutes, while the multitude listened in -breathless attention. - -“He is Kataafa’s talking man,” Klinger whispered to the count. “He has -told them that you are here to help crown their chosen king.” - -Captain Scott was becoming restless. These native “fonos” he knew were -often long drawn out affairs. He was anxious to be free, to sail away -from the Kapuan Islands. He did not relish being stopped by an American -war-ship. - -“Can’t you cut this short?” he asked Klinger. - -Klinger shook his head. - -“There’s no danger,” he assured Scott. “I have spies out, and when they -bring me news of any movement which may threaten us, there will be time -enough. The Kapuan cannot be hurried in his deliberations. We must be -sure these people are all on our side before we give them the means to -accomplish our purpose.” - -“How about my pay for carrying your guns?” Scott asked. - -Klinger nodded. “I have your check in my pocket,” he replied quietly. -Then he rose to speak to the assemblage. His words were eagerly heard -by the chiefs, and after he had finished the talking man in a loud -liquid voice gave Klinger’s meaning to the crowd. There was a murmur of -disapproval from several quarters. Chiefs arose at many points in the -crowd, their talking men beside them. It was considered undignified -for a chief to speak for himself. - -Klinger’s placid face remained calm. The count showed plainly his -anxiety, while Captain Scott smiled grimly. - -“A little previous, I’m thinking,” Scott said, shaking his head -knowingly. - -“What did you say to displease them?” the count demanded of Klinger. - -“I told them that for the support we should give them they must refuse -to trade with any one but us, and that Herzovinia would hoist her flag -at Kulinuu to protect them from the anger of the English and Americans.” - -“Is that all?” the count exclaimed. - -Klinger hesitated. “I also said that land claims of our people must be -acknowledged by the king before the arms were given them.” - -The count showed great displeasure. - -“What land claims?” he asked. - -“All claims,” Klinger replied. “The Kapuan firm holds many miles of -land claimed by English, American and Kapuans. The firm cannot give -this land up.” - -The count bit his lips. - -“It must be now exacted as a condition, count,” Klinger declared -insistently. “To give in upon any point would be considered by the -Kapuans a sign of weakness.” - -“You have delayed the thing unnecessarily,” Captain Scott growled. -“They’ll argue this point for hours.” - -Klinger was obdurate. - -“The harbor of Tua-Tua is one of our claims,” he said to the count in -an undertone. “The American government succeeded in leasing some land -there for a coaling station. That is the purpose of this condition. The -Americans must leave that harbor.” - -The count appeared puzzled. - -“After we have taken over the islands,” he said, “then we could ask the -American government to give up their lease.” - -“I have lived among these people many years, count,” Klinger explained -determinedly. “The island of Kulila, in which is Tua-Tua, is for -the most part loyal to Panu-Mafili. After Kataafa becomes king, he -must bring that island under control. We must help him to take the -warriors across the straits and supply him arms and ammunition to fight -successfully against Chief Moanga, who is a very formidable warrior. -Otherwise we shall not control all of the islands.” - -While the “fono” was still in progress a messenger arrived with -information of an important character. - -Kataafa heard the messenger in silence. He did not show by a single -muscle that the news displeased him. - -“The chief justice rendered his decision this morning,” Klinger told -the count in a whisper. “He has decided that Panu-Mafili is the king of -all Kapua, and all who take up arms against him are declared rebels.” - -The news had a quieting effect upon the natives after Kataafa’s talking -man had given it to them in his loud, eloquent words. - -“A lucky strike,” Captain Scott exclaimed. “Now I think they will -agree.” - -Kataafa, through his talking man, gave his word that all the conditions -made by the Herzovinians were accepted. - -The white men rose and left the council. The temper of the people, as -they passed out among them, was again happy. Smiles and hand-shakes -met them on every side. The war shout was begun and thundered out in -perfect time. - -“Kataafa Tupu-e-Kapua[29]--ah!” - -The people had declared their willingness to be declared rebels, and -undertook to defy the chief justice. - -Klinger’s face shone with delight. The first move was successful. Only -one more was necessary. Kataafa holding Ukula, while the few weak bands -of loyal natives were driven into the bush by his well-armed cohorts, -all the enemies of the Kapuan firm would be confounded. “So long as our -consul has the backbone to hold out against the other two consuls,” he -said aloud, “under the treaty no action can be taken by the war-ships. -Kataafa, with nearly five thousand fighting men, can take Ukula and -establish solidly his claim to the kingship.” - -Captain Scott shook hands with Klinger and the count. “This check I’m -giving you,” Klinger said insinuatingly, “is subject to recall if I -find you have not played square. You understand.” - -Scott smiled sadly. “You see, count, what it is to have enemies who -constantly defame one’s character. Have I ever acted in any other way -but square with you?” he asked. The count shook his head. - -“I haven’t examined the guns nor checked them over,” Klinger said by -way of explanation. “I hope they are as you represent.” - -Scott bowed and walked quickly to the beach, where his boat and crew -were waiting. - -The “fono” was breaking up. The natives, by villages, were marching -down to the beach; their weird chants could be heard on all sides. -Great war canoes, paddled by as many as forty warriors, were swiftly -launched, and sent across the water to the “Talofa,” where they ranged -alongside, tier upon tier. Kataafa, with half a dozen veteran chiefs, -dressed in white shirts and “lava-lavas,” their fly-flaps or fuis held -over their right shoulders, marched slowly down the street. The high -chief stopped at the steps of Klinger’s house. He now talked without -his talking man, but in Kapuan, and to Klinger. - -“Kataafa has taken the advice of his white friends. They tell him now -there can be no war. Kataafa loves his people; he loves his enemies.” -As he spoke his left hand played nervously with a little golden cross -on a fine gold chain slung about his neck. “If he believed there would -be war he would go away. But the ‘Alii papalangi’[30] know best, from -their greater wisdom. Kataafa does not understand papalangi thoughts. -He understands only Kapuan. You tell him to go to Ukula and make -himself king in house of Laupepe, who is dead. Very well; Kataafa will -go, trusting that all you have said will be true.” - -Klinger listened, greatly touched. All that he had told this honorable -old warrior Klinger believed would come true. No other contingency, he -thought, could possibly arise. Kataafa could march unopposed into Ukula -and make himself king. The English and Americans could not land their -men to oppose unless the Herzovinian consul also agreed to this action, -and Carlson had given his word to the count. There might possibly be a -few shots exchanged, and the foreign war-ships might feel called upon -to land guards to protect foreigners and their property, otherwise the -war would be only a skirmish. Then Kataafa, as king, could go to the -count or the consul and ask for the protection of the Herzovinian flag. -That would mean the annexation desired for so many years and always -prevented by the jealous English. - -“If it comes out differently than I have told you,” he replied gravely, -“I shall be greatly surprised. I have told you exactly what I believe, -and have kept nothing back.” - -Kataafa seemed satisfied. He smiled and bowed ceremoniously. - -Several natives came suddenly down the road, holding up their hands and -shouting loudly: - -“Papalangi!” - -Klinger ran out into the roadway to get a clearer view. Several hundred -yards up the crowded thoroughfare, moving slowly through the native -groups, were three American naval men on horseback. They came straight -toward him; passed him without sign of recognition, but doffed their -caps in answer to Kataafa’s greeting and rode out upon the beach of -Saluafata. - -Almost at the same instant Captain Scott, on board the “Talofa,” was -much perturbed at the sight of an English war-ship’s launch that had -suddenly appeared at the entrance to the harbor. - -One of the riders on the beach produced a big red flag which he had -been carrying and began calmly waving it, regularly. Then another -flag of similar color was shown in the launch. The sailor, sitting -quietly on his horse, speedily sent a flag signal. Having finished, -he waited until the flag on the launch was waved in return. Then the -three horsemen rode leisurely along the beach, apparently but little -interested in the marked activity before their eyes. - -Klinger and the count were dumbfounded. The high chief’s countenance -was greatly perplexed. - -Klinger knew only too well the significance of that signal, and the old -warrior had made a shrewd guess at the message conveyed. - -A single word from Klinger, and those three men might never return to -Ukula. - -Klinger saw at once the great danger in which the Americans had put -themselves. He called loudly, “Fanua, Fanua.” - -His native wife appeared, smiling and bowing gracefully. He spoke to -her in English, a language which Kataafa did not understand. “Go to -those papalangi,” he ordered huskily. “Tell them if they don’t ride -back, away from Saluafata, at once, I cannot be responsible for their -lives.” Fanua obeyed without question. Klinger watched her reach their -side and saw them stop and turn their horses’ heads--then, apparently, -calmly consider the message brought them. Many warriors had gathered; -their attitude seemed to Klinger to be growing every minute more -hostile toward the intruders. - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -SMUGGLED ARMS - - -As the Americans had ridden their ponies through the throngs of natives -in the street of the town of Saluafata, the cheery “Talofa, Alii” had -been conspicuous by its absence. Instead Phil’s interested glance was -met upon all sides by haughty and sullen stares from the dark-eyed -natives. - -“They’re up to some mischief,” O’Neil whispered, “and they don’t like -our being here. That’s sure.” - -The road or street led now along the sea beach. The schooner “Talofa” -lay anchored a few hundred yards distant. Nearly a dozen long -narrow-flanked war canoes hovered near or alongside. - -“Guns,” Sydney exclaimed excitedly. “Look, they are being passed down -by hand into those boats alongside.” One very large canoe manned by -nearly forty naked savages had just shoved off from the schooner. Its -crew was singing a stirring song, keeping perfect time with their -paddles as they propelled the canoe slowly down the beach. - -“They’ve blackened their faces,” O’Neil declared anxiously. “You know -what that means?” - -Phil nodded, his heart beating rapidly, and a thrill passed through him -at the thought. To blacken the face was a declaration of war. - -“Ride straight on,” Phil commanded, as they suddenly made a turn, in -following the street which now ran at a sharper angle toward the beach, -and saw before them Klinger and the count surrounded by natives in -chief dress. “I can see the British launch. She’s just at the reef near -the entrance to the harbor.” - -“There’s Kataafa himself,” O’Neil exclaimed excitedly in a low voice. -“The old man with white hair and moustache.” - -The midshipmen gazed upon him in awe mixed with admiration. They had -not seen him at such close range before. They saw a man straight and -sturdy, despite his sixty odd years of age. His countenance was not -fierce as they had expected to find it, but instead benevolent and -kingly. Every other face turned toward them showed upon it only too -plainly distrust, anger and resentment, but the high chief Kataafa -alone simply smiled a welcome and as they drew near said “Talofa, Alii, -Meliti.”[31] - -All three horsemen doffed their caps. - -“Talofa, Alii, Kataafa,” Phil returned. - -“Call up the boat, O’Neil,” Phil said; his voice was unsteady. “Say -Kataafa has guns, and warriors have blackened their faces.” They were -now on the sandy beach close to the water. - -O’Neil drew from his stirrup leather the red wigwag flag which he had -brought along for the purpose of sending news quickly back to Ukula -by the steam launch. He began at once to wave it over his head and -scarcely a second elapsed before a similar flag appeared in the bow of -the tiny launch nearly a mile away. - -“They were on the job,” Sydney exclaimed, while O’Neil went to work -rapidly to send the signal given him a moment before by Phil. - -[Illustration: HE BEGAN AT ONCE TO WAVE IT] - -“Sent and received, sir,” he reported as he flourished the flag in a -farewell signal and then calmly rolled it up, sticking it back into his -boot leather. Then for the first time the sailor noted the menacing -attitude of the people about them. - -A woman’s voice was calling them from the edge of the crowd. She was -endeavoring to reach their side. - -“Missi Klinger say you better ride back quick,” she cried, her handsome -face ashen with fear for the papalangis. “Come quick with me; it might -be death to stay longer.” - -Fanua put forth her most eloquent English. She had been educated at the -mission school, but like most natives was shy in speaking a foreign -language. She had taken Phil’s bridle rein, and now led his horse -through the crowd while the other two followed. - -“They won’t harm us,” O’Neil declared comfortingly, although he did not -believe his own words. “The signal has roused their distrust of us, -that’s all.” - -“We’re spies,” Sydney exclaimed. “Is it unnatural for them to wish to -harm us?” - -“There’s no war, sir,” O’Neil said, “so we can’t be spies. And -besides, we’re in uniform.” - -“Then under the laws of war,” the midshipman replied, “they can take us -prisoners.” - -“The news will get through just the same,” O’Neil said gladly, “and -Commander Tazewell will have warning in time to carry out whatever plan -he has decided upon.” - -Klinger had left his companions and had advanced to meet the returning -Americans. He walked beside Phil’s horse, while Sydney and O’Neil -pushed forward their ponies to hear. The manager’s face was the color -of his white clothes. - -“Don’t stop,” he warned anxiously. “Even the king Kataafa could not -hold his people if a fanatic should raise the cry to kill you.” - -Phil did his best to look haughty and unconcerned, but he could feel -his knees tremble against his pony’s flanks. - -“You’ve started your war, I see,” he mustered his voice to say, -endeavoring to put into it a note of scorn and defiance. - -Klinger did not reply to the accusation. - -The Americans were not slow to obey Klinger’s directions. Count Rosen -scowled darkly as they passed him. The chiefs gazed upon them with -angry eyes. Even Kataafa no longer wore his welcoming smile, but his -eyes were still mild and kindly. To Phil’s surprise the high chief fell -into step alongside his pony and trudged silently beside them; the -other chiefs closed in after O’Neil and quietly followed. Fanua, the -native woman, darted back to her house, upon the steps of which the -count was left alone. - -Upon reaching the top of the hill, Kataafa and his chiefs stopped while -the high chief waved a dignified salutation. “Talofa, Alii,” he said. -Klinger went on a short distance farther. He had by this time regained -his self-control. The danger had passed. - -“Tell your captain,” he said earnestly to Phil, “that Kataafa has -nearly every native in Kapua on his side. Tell him I say don’t let -the English throw sand in his eyes. He has the one chance in his -career to do something for his country. If he throws over the English -and supports us, Tua-Tua and the island of Kulila might be given to -America, and Kataafa will be king without bloodshed.” - -“I know nothing of my captain’s plans,” Phil replied distantly, “but I -will deliver your insulting message. I hope to be able,” he added still -haughtily, but with a forced smile, “some day to repay your civility to -us in Saluafata.” He saluted stiffly and put his pony to a trot. - -The Americans trotted their steeds until the little animals were -breathing heavily from their exertions. Then Phil allowed his pony to -walk. They were passing through a native village. Beyond the reef the -first of the war canoes was in sight, and an occasional shout from an -overwrought warrior as he paddled came distinctly to their ears. A curl -of smoke at the entrance of Vaileli Bay in the general direction of -Ukula marked the progress of the returning steam launch. - -It was nearly two in the afternoon before Phil and his party reached -town. In the road before the British consulate they saw drawn up a -company of British sailors, while on the lawn others were setting up -their white tents. The British captain and his consul hailed them from -the porch. - -“We were getting worried about you,” he called, waving a greeting. “You -see we’ve acted upon the information you secured.” - -Phil stopped and told the Englishmen briefly what they had seen, and -then continued toward the landing. - -Alice Lee spied the horsemen and ran out joyfully to meet them. - -“I began to be frightened,” she owned. “I am deathly afraid of a Kapuan -when he blackens his face.” - -Phil could now smile easily, but he acknowledged that the sensation of -being surrounded by a swarm of excited warriors, bent upon war, had not -been a pleasant one. - -The midshipmen were brought into the consulate, while O’Neil continued -to the landing. He had caught sight of the American sailors marching up -the road, and as he was in the landing detail, he feared some one might -replace him unless he returned to claim his rights. - -Commander Tazewell and the consul were on the porch, and the consul’s -daughters, looking slightly pale over the exciting news brought by the -steam launch, which had arrived an hour earlier, led the newcomers -forward to tell their story. - -“The chief justice gave his decision a very short time after you left -town,” Alice told them breathlessly. “The news was taken to Kataafa by -a fast canoe. I watched it from my ‘lookout’ until it went inside the -reef off Vaileli.” - -“Kataafa and Klinger must have known it when we saw them, then,” Phil -said to Sydney. “Klinger thought we knew it, too; that’s why he gave us -the message.” - -“What was it?” Alice asked eagerly, overhearing Phil’s aside. - -“To cut loose from the English and join his country in supporting -Kataafa,” Phil told her. “He would like to see America disregard the -chief justice’s decision.” - -“That looks as if Klinger and his crowd were worried over the outcome,” -Alice said thoughtfully, while the midshipmen nodded their heads in -agreement. - -Mr. Lee seemed very uneasy while Phil as spokesman gave a minute -account of their ride to Saluafata. He told of the hostile attitude -of the warriors and Klinger’s fears for their safety, and he spoke -admiringly of the old high chief Kataafa, who had acted as their -personal body-guard until the edge of the town had been reached. -Phil also did not hesitate to deliver Klinger’s message which he had -haughtily scorned but agreed to repeat to his captain. - -Commander Tazewell listened gravely, but to outward appearance was -unmoved. - -“Klinger has shown us his game,” he said after Phil had ended. - -The midshipmen would not accept the invitation to stay longer. They -were hungry and dusty after their long ride, and pined for a bath and -clean clothes. - -As they proceeded toward the boat landing, they gazed admiringly -at their sailors, pitching tents, erecting shelters and making all -arrangement for a protracted stay on shore. Lieutenant Morrison stopped -them to hear the news they had brought from the Kataafa camp. The -lieutenant was in command of the American sailors landed to protect -American lives and property that would be in grave danger when the -rebels attacked Ukula. Ensign Patterson, a big raw-boned young man, -with a happy, irresponsible disposition, but greatly loved by all for -his generous nature and rash fearlessness, was Lieutenant Morrison’s -assistant. He waved a joyful greeting from a mass of luggage, the -assorting of which he was busily directing. - -“It certainly looks like business,” Sydney exclaimed as they left the -busy scene behind and arrived in sight of the landing, where they found -a boat was awaiting them. - -They did not tarry long on the ship, but were soon again on their way -ashore. - -As the midshipmen passed again through the American camp, half-way -between the landing and the American consulate, they espied O’Neil’s -soldierly figure mustering the guard to be posted for the protection of -the west end of the Matautu district of the town. The English sailors -were guarding the eastern end. - -The boatswain’s mate brought his men to attention, and gravely saluted -the passing young officers. - -Lieutenant Morrison and Ensign Patterson were inspecting their -position. A Colt gun commanded the main road and another the road -leading inland along the Vaisaigo River. Temporary barricades were -being built back of the camp, facing the bush, behind which a stand -could be made if by chance the attack should come from that direction. -This, however, was unlikely, owing to the dense underbrush and the -boggy soil. - -Phil and Sydney greatly envied the officers with the sailors. They -were sure that there would be fighting soon, and very much feared that -they would find themselves out of it. However, Commander Tazewell had -shown the midshipmen that he trusted them and was willing to give them -hazardous and important duty, and they had reason to congratulate -themselves that the duty had been performed to their captain’s -satisfaction. - -“What about Captain Scott and the ‘Talofa’?” Sydney suddenly asked. “I -thought the captain was bent upon capturing him.” - -Phil shook his head. “I suppose he figures there are more important -things for us to do than to chase the ‘Talofa.’ He’s landed his guns -and gotten away by this time. Stump is still on board the ‘Sitka,’ -eating his head off.” - -“Captain Scott certainly played his game well,” Sydney declared. “He’s -a Yankee, all right. No one else would have been able to get so -handily out of the mess occasioned by Stump’s navigation.” - -At the consulate they found only the consul’s daughters. - -“They are having a meeting to decide what is to be done,” Alice told -them. “The new king Panu-Mafili and his chiefs just came to ask -protection. They have scarcely five hundred warriors, and Avao says -many of those are disloyal, and all their guns are old and rusty. They -bury them, you know, during peace, so they won’t be stolen.” - -“Imagine that,” Phil exclaimed, “and in this damp soil. But where’s the -meeting?” - -“At the house of the chief justice. The Herzovinian consul sent word he -was ill and couldn’t attend,” Alice replied. “Of course that means he -won’t agree with anything we decide to do.” - -The meeting apparently did not last long. The midshipmen saw the young -king, accompanied by several chiefs, among them the loyal Tuamana, -in company with Mr. Lee and Commander Tazewell, approaching. At the -consulate gate the natives solemnly bowed and departed. - -“Kataafa has sent in word,” Commander Tazewell told the lads, “that -he will enter Ukula and reëstablish his government at Kulinuu. The -king, Panu, desires to abdicate to prevent fighting, and has asked our -advice.” - -“And we advised him to yield,” Mr. Lee added. - -“There’s nothing else we can do,” Commander Tazewell said sorrowfully. -“If we had sufficient force we could support him, because he is the -rightful king; but two hundred sailors are not enough to hold the town, -much less be able to seek for and attack the rebels, numbering many -thousands and all well armed with new and modern rifles.” - -“Then there will be no fighting after all,” Phil exclaimed. And the -evident disappointment in his voice caused a general laugh. - -Commander Tazewell shook his head. “Some of the chiefs, among them -Tuamana, declared they would not submit, and would defend Kulinuu, but -I believe when they find themselves outnumbered their ferocity will -subside. We shall guard the Matautu district, and I’ve sent word for -all peaceful people to come here for protection.” - -The midshipmen were further told by their captain that Mr. Lee had -given over a wing in his big house, and he was sending word to his -steward to bring over a hand-bag of clean clothes, so the midshipmen -scribbled a note to one of their messmates to send along a valise full -of necessities. - -“It will give my daughters and myself,” Mr. Lee said gratefully, “a -feeling of great security to house you under our roof, and I hope we -can make up in our hospitality for the lost comforts you enjoy on board -ship.” - -Phil and Sydney exchanged amused glances. Their little two-by-four -cabin compared to a big, airy bedchamber on shore was certainly funny. - -The Herzovinian sailors that had been landed to guard Klinger’s store -were now reënforced and camped near their own consulate in the Matafeli -district of the town. A flagpole had been erected, and the Herzovinian -flag floated alongside the Kapuan standard not far away at Kulinuu. - -“One’s afraid and the other dare not,” Sydney exclaimed as he and -Phil lounged luxuriously in the capacious wicker chairs in their big -bedroom. “Herzovinia thinks she isn’t strong enough to back Kataafa -openly and we know we are not numerous enough to resist him.” - -“I don’t think the native enters into the question, really,” Phil -declared. “You see, Syd, a fight in which the white people might be -arrayed on both sides would certainly mean a diplomatic rupture at -home. That’s what the consuls and naval commanders are trying to -avoid. Herzovinia is deeply involved in this game. Commander Tazewell -hasn’t said so, but I believe he thinks that Count Rosen is really a -diplomatic agent sent here to create an intolerable situation. His -government is tired of this triumvirate control and wants to own Kapua -herself.” - -“I wish the English and Americans had taken the bull by the horns and -sent word to Kataafa that if he attacked Ukula they would fire him out -by force. I don’t believe then he would dare attempt it.” Sydney’s eyes -flashed. - -“Those natives we saw to-day,” Phil replied, “didn’t look as if they -could be so easily intimidated. I believe the decision made is the -best. We have a big cruiser coming with an admiral on board. When she -arrives we may have strength enough to uphold the decision of Judge -Lindsay. One nation has broken the treaty. Consul Carlson, in refusing -to help the other two consuls to uphold the decision, has shown that he -is partial to Kataafa.” - -At dinner that evening nothing but Kapuan affairs could be discussed. -No one thought of anything else. The district of Matautu appeared like -an armed camp. Hundreds of natives had arrived for refuge, bringing in -all their valuables. The balmy air reeked with cocoanut oil, and the -musical songs of men and women as they squatted under their hastily -constructed shelters were heard on every side. The terrors of war -rested lightly upon their childlike minds. To them war was only a -festival, an occasion for song, dancing, kava drinking and visiting. - -Before eight o’clock that evening many wild rumors were brought into -the camp by the women. Some of the refugee women had husbands on one -side and some on the other. Among the Kapuans, women are neutral, and -are free to go freely between the hostile camps. - -Alice and the midshipmen mingled with the natives in order to gather -all the news brought in. All indications showed that Kataafa would be -as good as his word, and would attack that night. - -The first part of the evening, however, dragged on and everything -seemed quiet in the direction of the native town and Kulinuu where a -few hundred loyal natives had undertaken unaided to uphold the rights -of their chosen king against the attack of the rebel hordes. - -Suddenly the startling rattle of musketry drifted down on the light -breeze from the other side of the bay. Shouts and cries of defiance and -anger could be distinctly heard through the still night air. Kataafa -had broken his sworn pledge made solemnly and in writing never again to -resist the constituted authority of Kapua. Three hundred odd sailors of -three great nations listened to the raging of the unequal struggle. -Among savages, might is always right. There was no doubt who would -be king of Kapua when the day dawned, Judge Lindsay and the treaty -notwithstanding. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -UKULA ATTACKED - - -The midshipmen hastened to tell Commander Tazewell the thrilling news -of the attack. They found him, however, on the porch fully dressed -together with the consul and his daughters. - -“I feel terribly concerned over Judge Lindsay,” Mr. Lee exclaimed -while all listened tensely to the fearful sounds of combat coming so -distinctly through the otherwise quiet night. The refugees huddling in -the bush and among the palm groves were all hushed to silence, harking -to the unequal battle raging nearly a mile away. “He refused to leave -his house to come to us. He thought his belongings were more precious -than his life, and feared if he left his house it would be looted and -destroyed.” - -There was no sleep for those at the American consulate that night. The -heavy firing was not, however, of long duration. Within the hour it -died away, except for an occasional shot. Then fires appeared at many -points along the entire water-front of Ukula. The rebels were burning -the houses of the loyal natives. - -The guarding sailors were alert, and although war parties appeared and -came so near as to be challenged by the outposts, they stopped only to -parley, and explained that the papalangi were safe and would not be -attacked. They were seeking only the followers of Panu-Mafili. - -The light of day revealed much of Ukula in ruins. Stores and houses -owned by Americans and English had all been looted and the houses of -the loyal natives were in ashes. - -Half-naked warriors, their hands and faces smeared with the life blood -of their victims, their eyes rolling wildly in savage ecstasy, paraded -the streets carrying on bamboo poles the gory heads of their victims. - -The Matautu and the Matafeli districts of the town were undisturbed. -In the latter place lived the Herzovinian merchants and their consul. -The Herzovinian sailors prevented the war parties from entering the -Matafeli district. Over five thousand warriors, unrestrained and -unorganized, roamed the town and surrounding country, pillaging and -firing their guns in savage license. - -Many shots had passed very close to those within the American lines, -and as the morning progressed the desultory firing became more frequent -and dangerous. Several of the native refugees had been hit by stray -bullets. - -While at breakfast news came from the British ship by signal that many -refugees from the battle-field had swum off to the ships and been -received on board; among them the king Panu-Mafili and Chief Tuamana. - -An hour later Mary Hamilton burst in upon Mr. Lee excitedly with the -startling intelligence that Judge Lindsay in his big house on the -Malima road was besieged by a war party under Chief Tuatele, and that -the excited natives were swearing vengeance upon the judge. Mary had -stolen through the pickets during the night and had listened, hidden -close to the camp of the rebels at the cross road leading to the -judge’s residence. - -“He must come in now, whether he wishes to or not,” Commander Tazewell -declared. “I’m going to send a guard after him.” - -Lieutenant Morrison and twenty-five men were quickly assembled and -departed to rescue the chief justice. Phil and Sydney were permitted to -go along. - -With their arms at the shoulder and bayonets fixed, the guard marched -away, the officers leading. Reaching the Malima road they turned inland. - -Hundreds of warriors carrying both guns and head axes made way for them -without a thought of raising a hand to stop them. - -When they arrived in sight of the judge’s house, nestling among -numerous fruit trees, and half hidden from the road, Lieutenant -Morrison deployed his men into a single line. Then placing himself and -the officers in front they advanced directly toward the low stone wall -surrounding the grounds of the house. - -Phil noted as they approached that many of the trees had been -destroyed, hacked almost in two with sharp axes, or stripped of their -fruit to appease the appetite of the hungry warriors. - -Suddenly the Americans were confronted by over a hundred natives who -had no doubt been apprised of their coming. - -Lieutenant Morrison stopped to parley. Chief Tuatele walked forward, -holding himself proudly erect. Mary Hamilton had gone along to -interpret. - -The lieutenant explained his errand and ordered the rebel chief to -withdraw from American property at once. The intimidation of the white -man’s unspoken threat was sufficient. In spite of protest from his -followers Tuatele obeyed, and the band of sailors entered the compound -unopposed. - -The chief justice met the lieutenant on his door-step. His face was -pale, but resolute. He refused to budge, and his plucky wife applauded -his brave decision. - -“I shall never turn my back upon them,” he exclaimed. “A judge is -answerable only to God. I have done my duty by my conscience.” - -Argument was of no avail. Lieutenant Morrison was in a quandary. - -A sudden shout of savage triumph broke from the rebels outside the -compound. “Tonga-fiti, tonga-fiti,” brought the argument to an abrupt -end. The judge’s house was on fire. While the Americans had been -attempting to persuade the judge to leave, a small party of rebels had -stolen into the house from the rear. That end of the house was now -ablaze. - -The judge and his wife were dumbfounded. - -“All that we own in the world is in that house,” the judge exclaimed, -a dry sob in his voice. Phil and Sydney turned to the lieutenant -inquiringly. Much could yet be saved. That officer understood the -unspoken question. He flung a glance at the jeering savages. - -“Yes,” he said, “half of us go in and save all we can.” - -Within a half hour the beautiful home was a heap of ruins, but on the -lawn was piled nearly all the judge’s possessions. His entire library, -his most cherished possession, was saved. - -“Lieutenant,” the judge said as he and his wife gazed mournfully at -the ruin of their home, “I’m afraid I must now change my decision and -go with you. It should be rare for a judge to have to reverse his -decision except on the occasion of new evidence, and in this case the -evidence is only too evident.” - -The midshipmen, O’Neil and some of the sailors had dragged from the -stable the judge’s carriage; the horses were gone, stolen by the rebels -during the night. - -“We’ll load it up and come back for a second load,” Lieutenant Morrison -decided as he saw the carriage was too small to carry everything. “I’ll -remain behind with half the men.” - -The sailors willingly manned the shafts and dragged the loaded carriage -out of the compound. The natives gazed lustfully at its contents. Their -blood was boiling for rich loot, and the silverware of the judge’s -table whetted their appetites. - -Phil observed the sudden movement even before he heard Mary Hamilton’s -cry of warning, and a sharp command brought a dozen bayonets level with -the advancing breasts. - -“Tell them, Mary, if they come nearer I shall fire,” he cried out -earnestly. In his heart he was terrified, for he knew that unless the -threat were heeded the Americans must be massacred. Once the Kapuan -warriors are aroused, they will kill until no enemy is left to resist -them. The fate of the Herzovinian sailors told him by O’Neil flashed -into his mind, and the thought was far from comforting. - -Lieutenant Morrison, scarcely a hundred yards away, realized Phil’s -danger, and quickly deployed his men to attack the enemy on the flank. -No other solution but fight occurred to any one. A single gun shot must -have been the signal for the battle to begin. - -Tuatele had seen the pantomime from a distance, and heard the excited -harangue of the native woman Mary. She had been soundly berating her -countrymen. - -“I’d think they were gods,” he exclaimed in savage admiration as he -watched the sailors, their guns at their shoulder and apparently calm, -“but I know they die and gods don’t die. But Kataafa order no kill -papalangi sailors.” Then he raised his voice and gave an order to -retreat, and the entire war party, uttering in unison a savage cry of -defiance, suddenly turned away and quickly disappeared into the bush. - -The judge and his wife were hospitably received by Mr. Lee and his -daughters, and their belongings when they all arrived were carefully -stored away in the Lee home. - -At lunch time a flag of truce appeared, carried by a small party of -natives approaching from the direction of the town. The guards went out -to meet them and escorted them within the lines. - -A large white envelope was then handed to Mr. Lee. - -The consul eagerly broke the seal and read the contents; his hands, -holding the paper, shook with suppressed indignation. All waited -anxiously to hear what it was that was so disturbing. - -“It’s outrageous,” he declared as he handed the letter to Commander -Tazewell. “Kataafa has made Count Rosen his prime minister, and asks -the consuls to recognize the new government. The letter’s in English, -but signed by the rebel chief.” - -Commander Tazewell studied the letter thoughtfully. “Well, sir,” he -said grimly, “it looks as if it was Hobson’s choice with us.” - -A footfall on the porch heralded a visitor, and the British consul was -soon seated at the lunch table. - -“Commander Sturdy has gone off to his ship to interview the natives -who took refuge with him last night,” he began hurriedly, his face -unnaturally flushed with excitement. “Did you also get one of these -impertinencies?” he exclaimed showing a crumpled letter in his hand, a -duplicate of the one Commander Tazewell was still holding. - -Mr. Lee nodded. “Yes,” he replied, “and Commander Tazewell has cleverly -showed me that we are confronted by a fact, not a fancy. Kataafa holds -the power. He is the ‘de facto’ government of Kapua, and if we don’t -recognize it, anarchy and license will continue until we do.” - -“I hear Judge Lindsay has been burnt out and a fight between the rebels -and your sailors was narrowly averted,” the British consul exclaimed. -“What are we coming to in Kapua? And it has all been brought about by -these scheming mercenary merchants.” - -Mr. Carlson’s portly figure approaching by the path from the road -dissolved the party at the lunch table. Miss Lee retired to look after -Judge Lindsay and his wife. The latter’s nerves had been greatly shaken -during the trying ordeal through which they had both passed. Fanatical -natives had surrounded their house during the night, threatening the -judge hourly with death and torture. Only the iron will of the man -in face of imminent danger, and a resolution that awed the savages, -prevented them from beginning an attack which once started must have -ended in the death of the chief justice. - -The midshipmen and Alice adjourned to the garden out of ear-shot from -the council of the representatives of the great Powers. - -“There won’t be any doubt of getting Mr. Carlson to agree upon -recognizing the new government,” Alice exclaimed heatedly. “I suppose -that’s what he came for.” - -“He must approve his own work,” Sydney replied. “There’ll be no chance -for an American or an Englishman, though, under this government.” - -“It’s a nice travesty upon the sacredness of treaties,” Phil exclaimed -in righteous indignation. “The great civilized nations sign a solemn -treaty to direct the government of Kapua. A chief justice is appointed, -confirmed by all three nations, to decide finally all questions arising -among the natives. The consuls, representing the three Powers, are by -the treaty bound to uphold the judge’s decisions, and to use their -war-ships to enforce those decisions. A decision is rendered. One -consul not only refuses to join in upholding it, but repudiates it -openly.” - -“Is it really as black as that?” Sydney asked thoughtfully, appealing -to Alice. “You know the natives. Whom do they want for king?” - -“Almost all want Kataafa,” Alice acknowledged. “He is, as I told you, -a god in the natives’ eyes. I can’t see why he cannot be king if his -people wish it, but Judge Lindsay has studied the case for a month, and -so decides.” - -“Of course,” Phil exclaimed, “the war is all a put up job. I would, if -I were able, indict for manslaughter every one of those responsible for -this rebellion or who selfishly refused to avert it lawfully. It made -me absolutely sick to see those ghastly heads on poles and know that -for every one a life had been sacrificed to satisfy the selfishness of -white men.” - -“Some one,” Alice said reverently, “will have to account for those -deaths before the great tribunal some day.” - -They saw Mr. Carlson bow formally and leave the consulate. - -“It didn’t take long,” Sydney said as they watched him go, mopping his -perspiring face as he passed through the gate and turned toward the -town. - -“Do you know,” Alice said thoughtfully, “he is a very kind-hearted -soul. I feel very sorry for him, because he is now shouldering the bad -deeds of others.” - -This short meeting of the consuls brought a temporary stability to -affairs in Kapua. The three consuls now formally recognized the “de -facto” government nominally under Kataafa. The count was to be the -prime minister; adviser to the king. Judge Lindsay was to again occupy, -if he would, the office of chief justice. The deposed King Panu-Mafili -and his chiefs, if they would go to Kulinuu, and humble themselves -before Kataafa, were to be permitted ashore, otherwise they must remain -in the war-ships. - -This all the loyal chiefs refused to do, and for their safety the -war-ships were forced to keep them on board. - -The next day Kataafa was formally crowned at Kulinuu, but no salute was -fired in his honor. The morning after the coronation the midshipmen and -Alice watched their sailors gather up their belongings and return on -board their ship. - -“They’ll be ashore again before very long,” Phil prophesied. “The -‘Sacramento,’ one of our big cruisers, will be on the way here with an -American admiral on board. I have an idea that he will not be content -to see the islands get away from us without an argument.” - -The town of Ukula was a sorry sight. Many valuable native houses were -in utter ruin. Many stores owned by the white men had been looted. -Empty cans were scattered about everywhere. Those canned delicacies -of meats, soups and vegetables, much prized by the natives, had been -consumed or carried away. Tin goods in Kapua went by the name of -“peasoupee,” because the first cargo of tinned goods ever received in -the islands was of the pea-soup variety. - -Armed natives were encountered on every hand, but their faces were no -longer blackened, and the savage ecstasy of war had partially subsided. - -Phil stopped a smiling native and asked him by signs to allow him to -inspect his gun. Alice spoke his own language to him, and the warrior -proudly gave his cherished belonging into Phil’s hands. - -“It’s a brand new ‘Snyder,’” Sydney said as they both handled it; “but -look, he has taken off the sight. Thinks it’s a useless ornament.” - -“Probably is,” Phil replied. “In bush fighting a sight is probably of -little use unless the native is trained to use it intelligently.” - -The three walked slowly along the main street. At the gate of the -Herzovinian consulate in Matafeli, they saw Count Rosen. All were -surprised to receive a cordial smile, as he raised his hat to Alice. - -“Look,” Phil exclaimed, “the boxes are still on the porch of the -Kapuan firm’s store.” - -All had stopped to gaze upon the mysterious boxes yet unopened. A crowd -of natives, laughing and jostling each other, covered the wide porches -encircling the store, and spilled over into the courtyard. - -“What is the cause of their merriment?” Sydney asked. Alice had drawn -near a group of native women who had stopped in front of the store to -gossip together. They turned and answered her question by pointing to a -large print pasted on the side of the house. - -The midshipmen could not curb their curiosity and drew nearer to get a -closer look. - -“I call that a low-down, contemptible advantage to take of friendly -nations,” Phil exclaimed, beside himself with indignation. What he -had seen was a colored cartoon from an English paper representing -Herzovinia kicking both Johnny Bull and Uncle Sam from off a tropical -island into the sea. - -The conservative Sydney would have stayed his impetuous chum, but Phil, -before his friend could realize his intention, had strode excitedly -forward, pushing the yielding natives from his path. Sydney saw him -take his penknife and deftly cut the picture from the house wall where -it had been roughly pasted. Then calmly rolling it up, Phil returned -and joined his astonished companions. - -“What have you done?” Sydney exclaimed in alarm. “They’ll consider it -an insult.” But Alice answered the question, admiration shining in her -excited face. - -“He has only prevented an insult going any further,” she said. - -They were about to retrace their steps to Matautu when Klinger suddenly -appeared from the interior of the store. He glanced first in amusement -at the Americans, and then up on the side of the house. The smile -faded. He asked a question of a native and received an answer. His face -became suddenly pale with rage. His gaze fell upon the cartoon rolled -up in Phil’s hand. Scowling darkly he advanced, one hand outstretched. - -“You will please hand over that picture,” he ordered sharply. - -Phil squared toward the manager, holding the picture behind him. - -“I decline to give it to you,” Phil replied in a voice he managed to -hold steady. “That is no place to display such a picture at this time.” - -Klinger was a man who had all his life governed with the overseer’s -whip. During his fifteen years in the South Seas his strong will had -never been seriously thwarted. What he wanted he took, using force if -necessary. He was a big man, somewhat inclined to stoutness, but the -outdoor life he had lived, in the saddle for days at a time, riding -over the plantations, had given a hardness to his added flesh. The -person confronting him, who declined to give back his own property, was -a mere youth. In his white flannels he sized up of much slighter build -if a trifle taller than the angry manager. Personal violence was far -removed from Phil’s thoughts. - -Klinger, with a snarl of rage, was upon the midshipman before he could -evade the rush. One of the manager’s great hands reached for the lad’s -throat, while his other arm endeavored to draw in and crush the slight -boy against his massive chest. Sydney and Alice could only cry out in -their surprise and alarm. - -The next moment Klinger appeared to plunge head first into the roadway -beyond, as if sprung from a catapult. The manager lay unconscious, a -huddled heap of brawn and muscle, while Phil, very pale and trembling -violently in apprehension, gazed upon his stricken foe. - -“Jujitsu,” Sydney exclaimed admiringly, yet in alarm, as he surveyed -the inert form of Klinger in the roadway. - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -COUNT ROSEN TAKES CHARGE - - -The signal victory won by Kataafa and his warriors and the -acknowledgment from the Powers increased many-fold his trust in the -two papalangi, who had so ably advised him and supplied the necessary -weapons for success. As the old chief surveyed the work of destruction, -however, his heart sank within him. The fear of the war-ships and their -thunderbolts, and a vivid recollection of the last war against the -papalangi spurred him to consult that man of few words, Count Rosen, -whom Klinger had said was vested with high powers from that great -nation beyond the seas, more powerful than both England and America. - -The English and Americans, he knew, would soon be crying aloud for -retribution. Their property had been destroyed by his warriors. The -life of the chief justice, an American, had even been endangered, and -his valuable house unlawfully burned. To Kataafa, the papalangi were -terrible people. Those in Kapua he did not fear; he had seen that they -could be killed and beheaded as easily as men of his own race; but the -intangible nations that protected them, sending war-ships “bursting -through the clouds,” as the Kapuans express the slow approach of a ship -coming up over the sea horizon--of these Kataafa stood in mortal fear. - -As the blood lust subsided among his warriors, already gossip bared its -disquieting head. Some said many war-ships of England and America would -come and destroy, as if by a volcano, their beautiful islands. - -Kataafa with his trusted chiefs marched solemnly to the Herzovinian -consulate at Matafeli. Count Rosen had taken up his abode in the -consulate. He received the chiefs in silence, and sent word at once for -Klinger to appear to act as interpreter. The count had that morning -been appointed by the rebel king his prime minister, and the three -consuls had acknowledged, in grudging terms, the “de facto” government, -as they pointedly expressed it. - -Klinger did not appear and finally the native messenger returned with -the information that Missi Klinger was very sick. The count excused -himself to the chiefs, telling them to wait, and hurried away to see -what was the matter. There on a low couch in the store office he -found the manager, but just regaining consciousness. A white doctor -was attending him, examining his entire body carefully for serious -injuries. The story of the encounter with the Americans was told most -graphically to the count by a number of native eye-witnesses, and each -described the strength of the “young David” as greater than that of -“Sampson” himself. The Kapuans are well up on the Bible and glory in -airing their knowledge. - -Klinger, when he came to himself, made a great effort to rise, thinking -his antagonist was still before him, but the doctor’s strong hands, -applying wet bandages to a very ugly contusion over his temple, upon -which he had struck in his fall, held him quiet. The count had taken -a seat at his side. He wore a displeased frown as he listened to the -babble about him. - -“Clear them out, please,” he exclaimed irritably. The women were sent -away, all but Klinger’s wife, Fanua, who waited patiently to be told -what to do. - -Klinger at length sat up and gazed about him. He raised a hand to -his aching head and felt the great bulk of wet dressing plastered by -the doctor over his cut. Then he read the displeasure evident in the -count’s face. - -“They did me,” he exclaimed. “One of them hit me with a black-jack.” - -“You’ve made yourself the laughing stock of the town,” the count -declared angrily. “I’ve heard the story. It was simply science against -unwieldy beef.” - -“I’ll show the young aristocrat,” the manager began to bluster, but the -count cut him short impatiently. - -“You’ll just drop this thing where it is,” he commanded authoritatively. -“It was a childish piece of folly to put up that cartoon, and the -youngster has my admiration. You should thank your stars you haven’t a -broken neck instead of only a small cut in your hard head. He used -jujitsu on you.” - -Such words did not sound sweet to Klinger’s ears. He was unaccustomed -to being taken to task thus wise, and the sullen expression on his face -showed plainly his displeasure. - -“Get yourself in shape,” the count added, his voice less severe in -tone. “Kataafa and his chiefs have come to the consulate, and I won’t -trust any of these professional native interpreters.” - -Klinger rose slowly to obey the summons. The count waited impatiently -on the porch of the store. He was not slow in seeing that the encounter -had hurt their cause. Anything that can be held up to ridicule by so -much is seriously injured. For policy’s sake he would have liked to -severely punish this young, athletic American. To do so would help the -prestige of the new government in the natives’ eyes, but he feared -that such high-handed measures might injure the cause for which he was -working by opposition from the Powers. - -When the count and Klinger reached the consulate the rebel chiefs laid -before them the plan which they had been discussing among themselves. -On request of the count, Kataafa so far transgressed the ancient -Kapuan custom as to talk without the delay of speaking through the -“talking man,” while Klinger readily translated his well chosen and -eloquent words. - -He desired the count to be at the head of the government as governor. -To take the place of chief justice of Kapua--to hoist the Herzovinian -flag by the side of the Kapuan flag and by so doing receive the support -of their war-ship. Further, he had written a “cry”[32] which he desired -be sent to the king of the count’s country, asking annexation. He -said the Kapuans were but children, and Kapua was but a bone between -three hungry dogs. He feared the coming of more war-ships, and would -willingly leave everything in the count’s wise hands. - -Count Rosen was deeply thoughtful. The wanton pillage of the Kataafa -warriors and their barbarous killing and beheading of the native -supporters of the chief justice’s choice for king had greatly shocked -him. He had failed to appreciate the natural cruelty of even the -gentlest savages when their primitive passion for bloodshed is -aroused. Now to accept this petition and hoist the flag could not be -considered. If there had been no bloodshed, then his countrymen at home -might have upheld him if he hoisted the flag and even formally annexed -the islands. But he could offer as his excuse in accepting the office -of governor the desire to bring about peace and allow the commerce of -the islands to continue unchecked and in accordance with civilized law. -But first he must feel his ground slowly. The other two Powers looked -on with jealous eyes. - -“I cannot be chief justice,” he said after a long pause, “until Judge -Lindsay has resigned that office. Send and ask him to continue in that -position, and if he refuses, Kataafa has the right to appoint another.” - -A letter was quickly written and dispatched. Within a half hour a -verbal answer was returned to the effect that Judge Lindsay did not -recognize any king of Kapua save Panu, and that he, Lindsay, was yet -the chief justice. - -The count smiled sardonically. - -“I shall accept the position of governor and perform also the duties -of chief justice,” he said, “under the de facto government, but -annexation we shall discuss later. First we must begin to repair all -damage done, especially to the foreigners.” - -Kataafa and his chiefs withdrew. They smiled triumphantly. They -believed all trouble had been lifted from their shoulders. This man, -the count, had relieved them of all disagreeable consequences of their -acts of violence. The men-of-war were undoubtedly afraid of him. So -argued the chiefs of the rebel leader. Upon the announcement that the -count was to be the adviser of Kataafa, the papalangi had carried their -sailors back to their ships. Now, since the count was equal to the king -or governor, maybe the war-ships would sail away “under the sea” and -not return. The other war-ships that people said were coming would be -afraid to let loose their thunder when they learned that this count and -representative of a powerful papalangi king was at the head of the new -government. With these quieting thoughts the stately chiefs filed out -of the consulate and turned toward the king’s residence at Kulinuu. - -Count Rosen was not afraid of the consequences of his act. He gloried -in the thought that his country was nearer a settlement of the Kapuan -difficulty than she had ever been. Yet there were points in the -proceedings which gave him considerable concern. The principal one was -his knowledge that the American commander had discovered the source of -the Kataafa guns and doubtless also suspected that the rebellion of -the old warrior had been planned in order to create just the situation -by which the Americans and English now found themselves confronted. If -he only dared raise his country’s standard over the islands! The count -reasoned that Kapua would be taken by the country whom the natives -chose to govern them. Now he had the opportunity of showing them what -good government really meant, and if he could succeed in winning the -native confidence, his country would be the choice of the people. In -the last war the natives, when maltreated and coerced by the Kapuan -firm and the Herzovinian war-ships, appealed to England for annexation. -England would have liked to grant the request, but her rival’s -friendship at that time was needed more than were the Kapuan Islands; -so no notice was paid by the British Cabinet to the pitiful cry from -the far-away South Sea monarchy. - -“Klinger,” the count said seriously, “you must take charge of the -native laborers. Repair all damage possible to foreign property and -guarantee to all just compensation. I shall grant full amnesty to all -the supporters of Panu-Mafili. Be careful,” he added severely. “Don’t -antagonize the foreigners. Don’t grab too much, or we may lose all.” - -Within a week Ukula and the surrounding country was as peaceful as -before the death of the old king Laupepe. New houses were going up -on every hand, a sure sign of future peace in Kapua. By order of the -count, who had taken charge of the government of the islands in fact as -well as in fancy, guns could not be carried by the natives. The natives -were encouraged to indulge in their Siva-Siva dances, at which the -count made it his business to be present. - -The English and American consuls maintained a haughty reserve when -they transacted business with the governor, as the natives called the -count, but a semi-friendly relation was soon established between him -and the naval officers. - -The count provided himself a new house, built within a month, on the -bungalow style, but of native workmanship, and invited all to a dance -given in celebration of the opening. - -The lawn in front of the house was on this occasion reserved for the -Siva-Siva dancers. - -The count received his guests in the lanai. The stately figure of -Kataafa stood by his side and all visitors shook hands with him most -cheerfully as they entered to greet the host. - -Phil and Sydney accompanied Commander Tazewell. Alice and her sister -came also, but Mr. Lee sent his regrets on account of indisposition. -The mail had not arrived from home, and both the British consul and -Mr. Lee considered it wiser in their official positions to refrain -from an act which might savor of a recognition of the justice of the -government. Judge Lindsay returned his invitation unopened. - -The house was decorated profusely with bright bush flowers, and their -perfume mingling with the odor of cocoanut oil with which all Kapuans -plentifully adorn their skins, gave the occasion a distinction which -remained long in Phil’s memory. - -Herzovinian and Kapuan flags entwined were everywhere in evidence. - -Everybody of any consequence, whatever their nationality, was there -and the count moved at ease among them. He was, however, particularly -attentive to the American commander. - -The best Siva-Siva dancers had been collected, and as the house was -entirely too small for the European dances, the guests were soon -gathered on the lawn, where many chairs and benches had been placed. -Two great bonfires had been built to furnish light in order to see the -graceful movements of the dancers. - -The count had escorted Commander Tazewell to the lawn. Phil and his -friends fell in behind and found themselves in the front row where an -excellent view was to be had when the dancers appeared. - -“Those old women are the orchestra,” Alice told them, pointing to a -dozen or more figures huddled up on mats beyond the illumination of the -bonfires. - -Even as she spoke the count had raised his hand as a signal to begin. - -Immediately the dim figures began to beat time with sticks upon their -mats; while from the darkness a volume of savage melody burst forth. -Then came slowly forward from the shadow into the illumination a score -of men in single file, their arms on each other’s shoulders. To Phil -it resembled the prison-gang step, but every move of their half-naked -bodies was graceful. The light reflected from their shiny skins gave a -startling effect. On each head was a green wreath. Gummed to cheeks, -ears and nose were hanging pendants of the leaves of the crimson -hibiscus flower. About their necks were worn circles of boar tusks -mixed with scarlet peppers and bright berries. - -They entered, first slowly, singing a low and slow measure which -increased as their movements quickened, until with a final rush they -threw themselves into a squatting position on the ground facing the -numerous audience. - -Great was the applause when an equal number of women suddenly made -their appearance from the opposite direction. Phil watched them -fascinated. On they came with pride and consciousness of exalted -position and importance. They were redolent and glistening with -perfumed oil. Garlands of bright leaves and vivid flowers, wonderfully -made, crowned their flowing locks. Like the men, necklaces from their -beloved bush adorned their graceful necks. About their slender waists -and hanging to the knee were fabulously valuable soft mats, their only -garments. Garlands of green leaves encircled their knees and ankles. -All this Phil knew vaguely before. His eager eyes clung to the leading -dancer’s face and did not leave it to define the marvelous costumes of -those following. The girl was Avao, and leading the Siva-Siva given by -Count Rosen and Kataafa. So surprised was he that he turned suddenly -toward Alice, a question bursting on his lips. - -“Wait,” she breathed. - -Avao, the Tapau of Ukula, daughter of Tuamana, the irreconcilable -loyalist, was dancing before his enemies, while he was still a -self-imposed exile on board the American war-ship. What did it mean? -Could it be that even Tuamana had been won by this remarkable foreign -nobleman? - -At length the dancers were in place, in two rows, the women in front, -and all seated cross-legged. The Tapau with her marvelous head-dress -of human hair and mother of pearl, glistening in the firelight, sat -smiling proudly in the middle of her troupe. The orchestra, now -reinforced by many good voices, was keeping time. The dancers were -motionless as if struck from gleaming marble and then Avao raised her -arms, flinging them out with graceful ease, and as if the twoscore men -and women had been molded into a single figure, every arm was flung -out in perfect unison with their girlish leader. It was a drill of -the most difficult kind, requiring years of daily practice. No single -person seemed to lag or get out of time, while all the while a weird -chant rose and fell and finally as the movements, at first slow and -deliberate, took on a galloping pace, the high treble of the women and -the harsh bass of the men mounted to a pitch of delirious and savage -ecstasy and then suddenly stopped. A thunder of applause greeted the -marvelous performance. Phil for the first time withdrew his eyes from -the savage beauty of the scene and saw that hundreds of sailors of -all three nations had been admitted to the show. He recognized the -uniform of the American sailors and smiled with pleasure at their warm -reception to the efforts of Avao, to whom was due the credit for the -perfect dancing of the youth and maids of Ukula. - -Figure after figure was performed. The enthusiasm of the natives rose -higher as the evening wore on. - -Suddenly the band began to play the Kapuan national air, and all rose -to their feet. After it had finished all eyes were again turned to the -dancers. - -Slowly, gracefully they swayed their supple bodies and arms. The -orchestra was silent except for the staccato time made by the sticks -striking the dry mats. The dancing and singing seemed to be done -subconsciously. No effort seemed to be used, yet all followed in -movement, in tune and in word, the leading Tapau, each performer -linking his own consciousness with the mind of the maiden as if -swayed by her will. What she did and said was done and said without -appreciable interval by each of the dancers. Such was the marvelous -degree of the training. - -“This is the last,” Phil heard the count say. “It is a song in honor of -the king.” - -Alice heard and smiled. Phil saw her lips tremble and her color pale in -the firelight. - -“Panu-Mafili o le Tupu-e-Kapua--ah!” - -A solemn hush came over the assemblage. The song gained volume, faster -and faster. Then a roar shook the air and the great concourse of native -spectators had risen to their feet. - -The performers appeared not to appreciate the meaning of the crowd. -Phil had risen suddenly from his chair--ready, but for what he did not -know. The song had conveyed nothing to his mind. He had not understood -the words, so swiftly were they sung. A glance at the count told that -he, too, was in the dark. Phil was conscious of Alice’s trembling hand -on his arm and heard her whisper, “They are praising Panu-Mafili as -king instead of Kataafa. Avao is getting her revenge for being asked -to lead. You know a Tapau cannot refuse to dance if asked by a chief.” - -With a final graceful sway the dancers jumped to their feet, their -hands held aloft in sign of finality. The audience had now completely -drowned the voices of the singers. Phil saw several chiefs rush toward -the dancers. The crowd was in an uproar. The dancers gave way before -the threat of those who had advanced, menacing them with bodily injury. -Avao stood almost alone, a smile of defiance upon her handsome face. - -“Is she in danger?” Phil asked excitedly of Alice at his side. “Would -they dare injure her?” Before Alice could answer Phil perceived the -distorted countenance of Klinger. He had risen from his seat at some -distance from the count. Phil saw him talking and gesticulating with a -group of natives, pushing them forward, as if directing them to commit -some act which they were reluctant to do. - -Avao, with unconcern in her face, appeared not to hear the torrent of -abuse heaped upon her from all sides. Several women darted toward her -and endeavored to tear her costume to pieces. She evaded these angry -rushes, but Phil saw that the temper of the crowd would not be appeased -until revenge upon this daring girl had been taken. - -“Look,” Alice cried out joyfully; “the sailors are coming to her -rescue.” Phil saw a mass of white suddenly encircle the cringing -dancers and then face outward toward the crowd. He recognized O’Neil as -their leader, and wondered what would happen next. - -Klinger was talking excitedly to the count. The latter had ceased to -smile. A dark frown was in his face. Then Phil noticed him raise his -hand to quell the disturbance. A loud voice of a chief at his side -warned all to silence. Slowly the babel died away. - - - - -CHAPTER XV - -THE “DE FACTO” GOVERNMENT - - -“Bring the girl to me,” the count commanded. - -The angry natives made way for the proud Tapau as she advanced toward -the governor. Phil read in their savage glances that this brave girl, -if she were left to their mercy, was in great danger. - -In front of the count and Commander Tazewell, Avao stopped. Her eyes -were cast down, but she held her head high; then making a low bow she -bent her knee in sign of submission. - -“Will you not sing for King Kataafa?” the count asked kindly. Phil -listened eagerly for her answer. The tumult about them was hushed. - -“Alii,” Avao answered, “I have sung for the king of Kapua. Panu-Mafili -has been declared our king by the chief justice.” - -Count Rosen’s face paled, and he bit his lips to suppress his great -annoyance and mortification. Klinger’s rough voice behind him was -distinctly audible. - -“Throw her out. We can get another Tapau leader.” - -“Will you not sing Kataafa’s praise?” the count asked, not heeding -Klinger’s interruption. - -Avao gave her answer readily and distinctly. - -“I will lead the song for Kataafa as a great chief, loved and honored -by his people.” - -“Don’t bother with the cantankerous girl,” Klinger recommended brutally. - -Commander Tazewell recognized the awkwardness of the situation. His -admiration was for the girl who had drawn down upon her head the anger -of most of her own race. Her loyalty to her father, Tuamana, and the -rightful king could not be shaken. He turned to the count, a smile on -his face. - -“We are all greatly indebted,” he said, “for this delightful evening. -I thank you for myself, officers and men.” Then after wringing the -count’s hand, he turned gallantly to the silent Tapau. - -“Will you take my arm?” he said. - -To the surprise of everybody and the chagrin of the governor and -Klinger, Avao passed her arm through the American commander’s and -together they marched determinedly toward the gate. Phil, Sydney, and -Alice fell in behind, while the sailors, seeing that the other dancers -were not to be menaced by the crowd, the entire blame being placed -on the shoulders of their leader, the Tapau, quietly dispersed, and -withdrew from the grounds. - -Having gained the road, Commander Tazewell relinquished his charge into -Alice’s keeping. - -“You must come home with me,” the young girl declared. “Oh, Avao! I -could hug you, if it weren’t for all that smelly oil you have rubbed on -yourself.” - -The midshipmen joined in praise of the heroine. - -“Avao,” Commander Tazewell said as he was about to leave the party at -the dock to return to the ship, “your courage to-night was of a higher -order than mere men display. You have taught your own people and even -others a lesson in loyalty and honor. They did not see it then, but -some of them will after they have had time to think over your simple -words. - -“What you said to the count,” he added as he shook her hand, “was -told to Kataafa by a chief at my side in his native tongue. The great -chief’s face showed no anger. I thought I read admiration and maybe a -consciousness of guilt. Kataafa, I fear, has been badly advised by his -trusted white friends.” - -Avao was too greatly touched to express her gratitude in English. A -flood of her own poetic tongue, only partly understood by the American -captain, was her answer. - -The midshipmen left the two young girls at the consulate and returned -toward the landing. - -“It was the count’s own fault,” Phil declared. “He sent word to Avao -that she must lead, and by the Kapuan custom, a Tapau cannot refuse.” - -“Well,” Sydney replied, “as O’Neil would say, ‘he got his!’” - -The easy-going life of the natives in Kapua now seemed to have again -returned. Under the new government many improvements were made. The -streets of Ukula were cleaned, and a campaign was made by the new -government upon the native neglect in leaving their fruit to decay in -the open, thus increasing the great pest of flies. The trade of the -Kapuan firm flourished. The foreign traders, English and American, -complained to their consuls bitterly. No one would buy from them. When -they asked their farmer customers the reason, they received the smiling -answer, “We shall soon belong to Herzovinia, so we wish to see how we -like to buy our supplies from them.” - -Several weeks thus went by without important disagreements between the -“de facto” government and the foreign consuls. Kataafa remained quietly -in Kulinuu. His army was not, however, disbanded. Their guns for the -time being were hidden from view, but the warriors who had assembled -from all parts of the islands in answer to the call of their choice -for king did not return to their homes. All the natives who had been -loyal to Panu, except the rightful king and his high chief Tuamana, -were again living their usual lives ashore. The latter two refused to -acknowledge Kataafa, and remained on board the “Sitka.” The two rival -factions lived side by side, apparently without discord. The women -engaged in many heated altercations, and frequently spread disquieting -alarms of impending strife between the two political parties, but -nothing ever came of these prophecies except now and then a personal -encounter between natives of diverging views, which was settled without -recourse to anything more hurtful than fists and clubs. - -One day the whole town of Ukula was ringing with the news of a murder. -A black boy, a Solomon Islander, on the Kapuan firm’s plantation at -Vaileli had been deliberately shot and killed by a Kataafa warrior. -The latter after committing the crime strolled proudly into the town, -boasting that he had shot a “black pig.” - -Phil and Sydney were in the consulate when Avao brought this -sensational news. - -Killing during a war was looked upon by the foreigners as in the order -of things, but during peace times such crimes could not be tolerated. - -“Give a child a gun,” Phil exclaimed, “and there’s no telling what will -happen.” - -Alice drew all the gruesome particulars from her native girl friend, -and retailed them to the midshipmen. - -“He did it just to see how his gun would shoot,” she told them. “And -when he found the bullet wouldn’t kill the black boy at the first shot -he walked up close and shot him twice more, then severed his head from -his body and brought it to town to show the wonderful power of the -rifle.” - -“What will they do about it?” Sydney asked. - -Alice shook her head. - -“The murdered black belongs to the Kapuan firm,” she replied. “He -was worth about a thousand dollars. Under the Kapuan law there is no -penalty for murder, but under the laws of the treaty the penalty is -death.” - -Every one was greatly surprised when they heard that the murderer -had been arrested by Johnny Upolu, on a warrant issued by the count -himself, and he would be tried by the native court of Ukula. - -The midshipmen and Alice did not miss the trial. It was simple, and -after the episode was told, the accused refused to make any defense. - -For three days the judges deliberated over their verdict. - -“It’s a wonder to me,” Mr. Lee said, on his porch after the trial was -over and before the verdict had been given, “that there haven’t been -more of these terrible affairs. Nearly five thousand natives now have -guns hidden in their homes and there’s no telling when the lust to kill -will come to some of them. As I watched this murderer’s face during his -trial, I could see no signs of penitence. He seemed to be proud of his -exploit. If they would hang this fiery young warrior publicly it would -make me think more kindly of the count and his government.” - -The midshipmen readily agreed to the sentiment. - -“But,” Phil objected, “the count is trying to gain popularity with all -the natives, and if they hang this man for only killing a black slave, -the natives will consider they have been treated unjustly. I doubt -whether the man will be punished.” - -“If he is not,” Mr. Lee exclaimed, “it will be a blot upon our -civilization, and I, as American consul, will strongly condemn the -morals of this unrighteous government that permits a murderer to move -among us unpunished; in fact, worshiped by the others as a hero.” - -Mary Hamilton paid the consul and his family a long visit. Her husband -was one of the five judges who were still considering what to do and -she was eager to learn what the American “Alii” thought, in order that -she could go back and give good advice to her lord and master. - -“It is very difficult,” she said in remarkably good English; “if they -find the man guilty and order his death all our people will cry out -upon the judges for hanging a brave warrior who has done nothing wrong -fa’a Kapua. To kill a ‘black’ man is all the same as shooting a pig. -And,” she added, “if they say what they would like to say and set the -man free, the count and Missi Klinger will be very angry, and after we -belong to their country will punish the judges severely.” - -Mr. Lee laughed, despite the seriousness in Mary’s voice. - -“It’s their duty, Mary,” he replied, “to find according to the facts. -If this man killed another deliberately and without provocation they -should condemn him to be hung. If the man were a white man and I were -the judge that is what I should be bound to do.” - -Mary looked puzzled. - -“But, Alii,” she replied, “this man is a very good man. He is a fine -fighter, and a leader among the men of his family. This black boy was -no good. Is it right that a good man be killed just because a bad black -boy is killed?” - -“A life for a life, Mary,” Mr. Lee replied firmly. “That is the white -man’s law.” - -The next day the judges gave their decision. It was that the native was -guilty of murder and must be hung. - -The midshipmen were passing the jail a few days after the sentence had -been given. They saw the prisoner squatting quietly within the doorway -of the prison, talking unconcernedly with his policeman guard. - -“I feel sorry for that poor chap,” Sydney said sadly. “He’s a victim of -white interference. Why should we force our laws upon these savages? -According to his method of thinking, he has done no more than step -on a cockroach, and he can’t see why we make so much fuss about it. -Anyway, he doesn’t seem to be worrying--nature has omitted nerves in -his make-up.” - -Phil had drawn near and now spoke a few words to the condemned man, who -smiled affably and pointed gleefully into the next room, where several -natives were going through some mysterious looking pantomime. - -“Go ahead; don’t mind us, Johnny,” Phil exclaimed as the chief of -police and his assistants stopped their performance and glanced -sheepishly at the midshipmen. - -“By George!” Sydney exclaimed in horror. “A rehearsal before the -principal.” - -One policeman was carefully greasing a wicked looking rope with a -knot and noose at one end. Three others were practicing pinioning and -“turning off”[33] the culprit. One, to make the scene realistic to -their admiring audience, was chained and placed in the corner of the -room. The other two then would approach with straps in their hands, -knock off the shackles from the supposed condemned man and quickly -pinion him. Then the three would march slowly to the middle of the -room. They adjusted an imaginary noose, drew on a real black cap over -the make-believe prisoner’s head, adjusted the straps and then at a -sharp word of command, all but the make-believe condemned man stepped -smartly aside, and then one went through the motion of springing the -trap upon which the blindfolded policeman was supposed to stand. Johnny -Upolu told the midshipmen proudly that they had practiced it over a -hundred times already, and hoped that it would be a sight worth seeing, -and advised them not on any account to miss the real hanging. - -The prisoner understood sufficient English to understand and smiled, -adding his wish that they should not miss the show. - -“How’s that for nerve?” Phil exclaimed. “Sitting there watching himself -hung and actually smiling over it. I’m certainly not going to miss the -real thing. I wonder if his splendid nerve will break down at the last?” - -The day of execution was set at a week hence. The “de facto” -government, as the British and American consuls insisted upon calling -it, apparently had decided that in the interest of civilization the -dread sentence of the law should be carried out with due decorousness. - -Stump, who was by trade a carpenter and who had in some unaccountable -way been experienced in erecting gallows, was seen directing the -erection of a novel sort of framework on the public “Malae”[34] at -Kulinuu. - -“Who gave you the job?” O’Neil asked Stump, after he and Marley had -watched the work for several minutes. - -Stump did not answer; instead he drew near the boatswain’s mate and -whispered anxiously: - -“‘Bully’ Scott hasn’t left the islands yet. He and the ‘Talofa’ are -around at Saluafata harbor, the other end of the island. He sent me -word by a native to come back, or he’d come and get me.” - -“You don’t believe he will, do you?” O’Neil asked. - -“There ain’t many things he won’t do when he sets his mind to it,” -Stump replied nervously. “Klinger offered me this job,” he added. “I’ve -done some smart carpentering in my time. I’ve got to earn enough money -to pay my way back to ‘Frisco.’” - -O’Neil’s sympathy was aroused at once. - -“You’re an American,” he said. “Why don’t you ship in the navy? We need -a carpenter.” - -Stump shook his head. - -“No more going to sea for Ben Stump. I’m going home and look up my -folks.” - -“When’s this show coming off?” O’Neil asked, changing the subject; he -saw Stump wasn’t keen to go in the navy again. - -“Between you and me, Mr. O’Neil,” Stump confided, “I don’t believe -this here gallows will ever grow any fruit.” Stump was about to say -more, but perceiving Klinger riding his pony toward them, he shuffled -awkwardly away, and began again to direct his native workmen. - -“Did he mean they ain’t going to hang this murderer?” Marley asked of -his friend. - -O’Neil nodded. “I think he did,” he replied, “and I guess he’s about -right.” - -The day before the execution a rumor passed through the native -population that the man who had killed the black boy would not be hung, -after all. - -Alice brought the gossip to the consulate. - -“They would hardly dare a rescue,” Mr. Lee declared. - -“O’Neil said he had heard from Stump, the man who built the gallows, -that it wouldn’t be used,” Phil informed them. - -“Just playing to the gallery, I reckon,” Commander Tazewell suggested. - -“If I were only sure the poor fellow won’t be hung,” Alice said -earnestly, “I’d go and see the ceremony.” - -“It’s no place for women,” Mr. Lee said reprovingly. “On the contrary, -if I thought the ‘de facto’ government was honest in its desire to -promote the Kapuan morals instead of making a fiasco out of it, I’d go -and occupy a front row seat.” - -The next day when Phil and Sydney with many other curious white men, -both from shore and the war-ships, reached the Malae, they found -gathered a great throng of natives of both sexes. - -“I guess Stump, O’Neil and all the rest of them were wrong,” Phil -said, after they had taken their seats and noted that the hour set had -nearly arrived. Below the gallows the prisoner sat in a chair, just -as unconcerned as he had been when he watched the pantomime rehearsal -of his own death. Mr. Carlson, in full consular uniform, was the only -official present. The king, with the count seated on his right hand, -was a few yards in front of the gallows. A company of native soldiers -under arms was drawn up near the high structure. Klinger was standing -off by himself apparently only an interested spectator. - -Phil saw Stump behind the prisoner; apparently, he was to advise the -native hangman, and make sure that there would be no painful error in -the proceedings. - -“It’s a life for a life,” Sydney exclaimed turning almost sick, as he -saw the prisoner jerked to his feet by Johnny Upolu and his two drilled -assistants. The irons were quickly struck off and the man’s arms -pinioned in a manner that reflected great credit upon Johnny. A native -band suddenly struck up a doleful march, and the death party, keeping -perfect time, moved off to the very foot of the ladder of the gallows. - -“I’m sorry I came,” Phil said nervously. “I don’t want to see the poor -fellow put to death.” - -“Look!” Sydney exclaimed. The Herzovinian consul had risen and was -walking toward the king. The music suddenly stopped. The prisoner, held -on each side by a policeman, was stopped, one foot already upon the -ladder to the platform. - -The midshipmen gazed in wonder at the sudden interruption. They saw the -consul present a paper to the king, who quietly read it, then bowed his -affirmative answer. - -“A reprieve,” Phil exclaimed. “I’m glad of it, and I’ll never go to -another hanging.” Both suddenly laughed nervously. They were glad in -their young hearts that the murderer was not to expiate his crime on -the gallows. - -A talking man rose to tell the people. The midshipmen could not -understand a word, but the effect upon the crowd showed the news was -to their liking. Suddenly several voices were raised in song; slowly -the volume increased until every native had joined in. It was a song of -praise for Herzovinia. - -“A play for popularity,” Sydney said disgustedly as they moved away -toward the road and back to the landing. “And another step toward -annexation.” - - - - -CHAPTER XVI - -CARL KLINGER - - -Avao appeared at the consulate one morning a few days after the count’s -Siva-Siva dance, her black eyes bright with indignation. - -“See,” she exclaimed as she handed to Alice a sheet of paper on which -was printed a dozen or more lines. - -Alice read slowly, the color mounting to her cheeks and her breath -coming faster. - -“They have confiscated all of Tuamana’s land,” she exclaimed, “and -branded him a rebel to the king. This is the official notice posted -about the town.” - -Phil, in spite of the evident seriousness of this act to the native -girl, could not suppress a smile. - -“Kind of mixed up affair, isn’t it?” he said quietly. “Rebel Kataafa -brands the loyal Tuamana a rebel.” - -“This is Klinger’s work,” Alice declared. “The land is most valuable, -cocoanut and banana groves, and worth a dollar a tree every year for -the copra alone. There must be over a thousand trees on the land. It’s -a fortune, and it is all that Tuamana’s family possesses.” - -“Can nothing be done?” Sydney asked solicitously. “Where is it located?” - -“Let’s go and look it over,” Phil suggested, “if it isn’t far away.” - -The horses were quickly saddled and the four were soon on the way to -visit the family estate of Tuamana, chief of Ukula. - -It was near the sea beach, to the eastward of Matautu. As they -approached the cocoanut grove they beheld a number of black boys[35] -running barbed wire through new fence pales, recently set up. - -“They are fencing it off already,” Alice exclaimed as they halted their -ponies. - -Avao pushed her pony across the wire that had not as yet been -stretched, calling to the others to follow. Very soon they arrived -in front of a very large native house. Several women sitting within -quickly arose and greeted them. - -Avao talked with them for several minutes. - -“My relatives say that Missi Klinger has ordered them to move their -house; that it is on the Kapuan firm’s property,” Avao said, her voice -breaking in mortified anger. - -They had all dismounted and several of the native men had climbed trees -to gather fresh cocoanuts for their visitors. - -Suddenly a cry of alarm was raised, and one of the young natives -slid quickly down the tree and dodged off into the bush. Phil and -his friends had just reached the house when they heard a hoarse cry -of anger, followed by a loud report as of a pistol discharge. Phil -hurriedly moved until he could see between trees that the other native -was standing at the foot of the tree into which he had climbed, and -that Klinger was beating him with his slave whip. The native was -silent, stoically accepting the punishment from the white man, while -yet in his hands were several green cocoanuts he had just gathered. - -“Who is the native boy?” Phil asked of Avao. He saw her lips were -trembling. - -“My cousin,” she said. - -Phil, acting upon a strong impulse to protect the native, who had been -acting in his own service, turned and rapidly approached the brutal -scene. - -“Mr. Klinger,” he exclaimed tensely, “you will please stop whipping -that native at once. It’s outrageous. What has he done to deserve such -punishment?” - -With his whip hovering over the bruised back of the native, Klinger -gazed angrily at the intruder. - -“This is my method of punishing these rebels who steal my fruit,” he -replied, and then the cruel whip again fell upon the native’s quivering -back. - -“Stop it, I say!” Phil cried determinedly. “I shan’t stand idly by and -see you maltreat that poor fellow. He was gathering his own fruit for -us to eat. You are the one who is stealing other people’s fruit, and -what’s more,” and Phil’s voice rose high in indignation, “if you don’t -get off of this place and take your slaves with you, I’ll whip you with -your own rawhide.” - -[Illustration: “YOU ARE SIMPLY A BULLY”] - -Klinger’s hand dropped to his side in sheer dumbfounded amazement. He -gazed in bewilderment at this young man, not able to realize that -such words had been addressed to him. - -Phil made a sign for the native to go, and the stolid but mystified -native smiled in his pain and moved out of reach of the whip. - -“Now go,” Phil commanded to Klinger. “This place is private property, -and you are trespassing.” He pointed the way out. - -Klinger slowly recovered his balance. Then a sinister smile spread -slowly over his face. - -“I can show you that you and your friends are the trespassers,” he said -evenly. “Here is my title to the property, signed and executed by the -court.” He drew forth a paper from his coat pocket. - -Phil gazed squarely into Klinger’s face unwaveringly. “You heard what -I said,” the young midshipman replied. “I saw the way you horsewhipped -that inoffensive native; if I were he I would wait my chance and give -you back two blows for every one received. You are a brutal coward! -Your kind don’t fight. You are simply a bully!” - -Klinger, fairly aroused, was now stung to action; again he raised his -cruel whip, slinging the long lash behind him and retreating a step -to give the blow fair play. Phil did not budge. He saw the long leash -raise itself as if alive from the ground; he heard it sing in the air -above him, expecting it to wrap itself stinging and biting about his -neck. But it passed harmlessly a few inches from his shoulder and fell -upon the ground at his feet with a dull report. Then he could hardly -believe his eyes, for his antagonist was rolling on the ground, a naked -brown body clinging desperately to him. - -Phil was transfixed in astonishment. His first intention, to go to the -aid of the native, he saw was unnecessary. The supple native boy had -found his strength and was slowly choking the breath from the manager’s -body. Klinger’s face had turned purple before Phil could persuade the -injured native to desist. The boy was fairly delirious with savage -joy over his wonderful achievement. Klinger lay insensible upon the -ground. Phil stooped, the manager’s whip in his own hands, and tore the -man’s shirt at the neck and felt for his heart. He feared that some -permanent injury might have been done him. - -Sydney and the others were now at Phil’s side. Avao openly praised the -native boy for his prowess, and Phil learned that a command from her -had sent this young bundle of steel muscles to protect him from the -manager’s cruel whip. The native grinned for joy. He had discovered his -own manhood and protected a papalangi friend of the queen of his clan -from a ruffianly slave driver. - -“He’s nearly choked to death,” Phil announced as he rose to his feet. -“That boy has the strength of a young gorilla in his hands. Look at -those marks on Klinger’s neck.” - -The manager’s neck was a sorry sight; the cords and muscles had been -twisted and almost pulled bodily from the broad throat. - -“He’ll have an awfully sore throat when he wakes up,” Sydney said -quietly. - -“We must get him to a doctor at once,” Phil exclaimed. “Avao, call to -those slave boys. We must have him carried to town.” - -The Tapau called, and several of the blacks started toward them. - -Then Phil thought of the native boy who had come to his aid. He feared -for him. He knew that some cruel and unheard-of punishment would be -given to the native that dared to so roughly handle the manager of the -Kapuan firm. Death even was not impossible, especially as the native -was a relative of Tuamana. - -“Avao,” he whispered, “tell the boy to go away far and not come back -until you send him word.” - -“He knows, Alii,” Avao replied. The boy pressed his forehead hurriedly -to the girl’s hand, and then murmuring, “Tofa, Alii,”[36] with a -cheerful grin vanished into the “bush,” just as the first of the -Solomon Islanders arrived to raise their fallen master. - -With Klinger carried on the shoulders of several black boys, and with -the Americans bringing up the rear, the party proceeded toward the town. - -Fortunately a carriage was hitched at the British consulate and the -driver sitting in the shade near by. They put Klinger inside, while -Phil and Sydney remained to support him, and thus they drove hurriedly -to Klinger’s residence back of the store. - -“This isn’t going to improve the kind feeling between us and the ‘de -facto’ government,” Phil said. - -“I’m glad you are not responsible,” Sydney declared. - -“But I was,” Phil insisted. “I goaded him on to strike me. I had an -irresistible desire to take his whip and give him a plentiful taste of -his own medicine. He would have struck me, too. I saw it in his eyes. -He has an ungovernable temper, and was clean off his head.” - -“Why will you be so rash?” Sydney asked affectionately. “Some day -you’re going to get into serious trouble.” - -“I can’t help it, Syd,” Phil answered soberly. “Such acts as that, -beating an inoffensive native, make my blood boil, and I’m thankful I -have the courage and strength to interfere. You would have done it too, -Syd,” he exclaimed, “if you had seen it before I did.” - -Sydney shook his head. “No,” he replied. “My blood is more sluggish -than yours. You did exactly right though, Phil.” - -Phil was silent for a moment. Klinger’s face was now regaining its -color, but his body was still limp and his eyes closed. - -“Syd,” Phil said quietly, “you are really more solid than I. You -reflect before you act. I too frequently act upon impulse without -reflection.” - -“You act, though, only upon good impulses,” Sydney replied. - -The carriage stopped in front of the Kapuan firm’s store, and a couple -of bystanders were impressed to carry the injured man inside. - -“Go tell the ‘fomai,’” Phil instructed a native woman, and she departed -quickly to obey. - -“Shall we wait?” Phil asked nervously. This part of the ordeal was -trying for the midshipman. - -“I guess we must,” Sydney replied. “We shall have to explain how it -happened.” - -Phil frowned. “I’m not going to reveal the identity of that native boy. -Maybe Klinger did not recognize him.” - -The manager had been carried into his own room, while Fanua, his native -wife, hovered over him anxiously. She gazed in open distrust upon the -two officers. - -“Here comes the little doctor,” Sydney exclaimed in relief, as the same -fat, middle-aged man that had before restored the injured Klinger after -his earlier encounter with Phil pushed his way through the crowd of -inquisitive natives, and entered the room. - -Klinger had opened his eyes. The pain in his throat made him cry out -weakly. - -The doctor examined the injured man’s neck in silence. - -“A black boy run ‘amuck’[37]?” he asked after he had finished the -examination. “It looks as if a whole gang had risen against him.” - -Klinger tried to speak, but his voice failed. - -“We’ll leave now,” Phil returned. His nerves were under tension. He -felt no sympathy for Klinger, yet wished to avoid a disagreeable scene -with the injured man. “I shall be ready to give my story whenever it is -asked for. Good-day, sir.” - -Sydney followed Phil from the room. - -“It’s a relief to get away,” Phil declared. - -They went at once to the ship and told their story to Commander -Tazewell. - -“That isn’t the only land grabbing the Kapuan firm has been indulging -in,” he informed them. “Our lease of land at Tua-Tua in Kulila has been -declared illegal by Kataafa and affirmed by the acting chief justice, -Count Rosen. The Kapuan firm, I hear, brought in evidence of a prior -claim of purchase. Of course it’s a trick, but we can’t prove that -before an interested judge.” - -The midshipmen drew in their breath in surprise. Evidently the land -grabbing was not confined to property owned by uninfluential natives. - -“I have searched all morning,” the commander exclaimed annoyedly, -“for the lease signed by Moanga, the chief of Tua-Tua, who owns the -property. I took it from the safe yesterday and thought I had returned -it there, but it is not in the regular envelope. Probably it is only -mislaid, and I shall find it among my other papers. I’m afraid I’m -getting careless. A natural effect of this torrid climate.” - -“Are you going to dispute the claim?” Phil asked. - -“That was my intention,” Commander Tazewell replied, “but the lease is -a private one between Chief Moanga and myself. It must be confirmed at -home before money is appropriated. Of course I acted under instructions -from the Navy Department. It’s embarrassing not to find the paper, -because I cannot register an appeal very well without it.” - -“Do you believe it has been stolen?” Phil asked earnestly. His thoughts -had gone to the orderly Schultz. - -“That isn’t likely,” the commander said, shaking his head. “No one has -access to my cabin while I’m not here except a few trusted men who keep -it clean, and my orderlies, and all of them are men with excellent -records. No,” he added certainly. “It’ll turn up; it’s probably in a -wrong envelope, and I’ll find it after more search. - -“So Klinger has again come to grief through you,” he said to Phil -suppressing a smile of gratification. “I am glad you did not carry out -the threat you made. I wouldn’t care to have my officers engage in -fights with civilians. It doesn’t look well outside, even though it may -have been justified.” - -Phil acknowledged the mild rebuke. - -“I know I’m too hasty,” he said humbly. - -The next day news came from ashore that all the male relatives of -Tuamana had been arrested for the assault on Klinger and thrown into -jail. The house the midshipmen had visited the day before had been -demolished by order of Klinger, and the women turned off the place. - -Alice was keyed to a high pitch of excitement when the lads saw her in -the afternoon. - -“They tried to arrest Avao, too,” she exclaimed, “but she ran away and -managed to reach the consulate, where they dared not touch her. All the -land belonging to Panu’s family in Matafeli has been claimed by Klinger -for his firm,” she told them almost in a breath. “Where will it all -stop?” - -“It won’t stop,” Phil replied savagely, “until the present outfit -are put out and the legal government is put in. The treaty is being -violated right and left. I can’t see what this man Count Rosen expects -to gain by it. The three great Powers when they hear what is going on -down here must decide that the high-handedness of Rosen and Klinger -have only made things more difficult to adjust.” - -“Maybe that’s where the count expects to gain,” Alice said seriously. -“Maybe their country wishes to make difficulties--to show the other -nations that three countries cannot together run one little group of -islands without war and bloodshed.” - -“I, for the life of me,” Sydney declared, “cannot see why the United -States and England don’t pull up stakes and leave the islands to -Herzovinia. I know we have our eyes on the fine harbor of Tua-Tua, but -I can’t see when we are going to use it.” - -“Maybe you can’t see!” Phil replied sarcastically, “and one reason you -can’t see is that you haven’t given it a minute’s thought. Herzovinia -has a body of intelligent men in her government whose duty it is to -study such questions. It is quite evident those men have advised their -nation to endeavor to acquire Kapua, and this is her way of trying to -acquire it. The captain of the British war-ship told us the other day -that he had seen their machinery of annexation work over in Africa. - -“First comes the merchant, pushing his way in by brute strength and -awkwardness, shoving out all other merchants by staying close to his -job. Then a row between the merchants and the natives, followed closely -by the arrival of a war-ship. Then a punitive expedition against the -natives who have dared to resent the oppression of the merchants. -Then diplomatic correspondence assuring other nations there is no -thought of acquisition of territory and then all of a sudden up goes -the Herzovinian flag, and the thing has been accomplished. As I said -before,” Phil ended his impromptu speech, “I can’t see why the count -hesitates about hoisting his flag. We can’t stop him. We haven’t men -enough.” - - - - -CHAPTER XVII - -BEN STUMP LISTENS - - -Carl Klinger paced the porch of the count’s home in visible annoyance. -Count Rosen surveyed the angry overseer complacently from his easy -chair under the shade of the thatched roof porch. - -“Don’t be an idiot, Klinger,” he said. “You can’t afford to indulge -in personal vengeance. The American officer has gotten ahead of you -and put you to shame before the natives, and I think you deserved it. -Your work was childish. Putting that cartoon on your wall was bad -enough, but to attempt to thrash a native relative of Tuamana under -the eyes of his own friends and supporters was infantile. If you don’t -stop swearing vengeance upon that young midshipman I’ll be forced to -lock you up in your own house and put a guard over you. To attempt -such barefaced outlawry as an attack upon the person of an American -naval officer by hired thugs would only lead to intervention by the -war-ships.” - -Klinger sulked in silence, and the count continued: - -“The last mail steamer carried Kataafa’s appeal for annexation. It was -to be cabled from San Francisco to our government. An answer should -reach here now in a few days. The news of the war of course is now -known everywhere, but I am sure our own war-ship with instructions -for us will arrive first. The United States may beat us, but upon the -appearance of a Yankee ship I’m going to hoist the flag. Even sooner if -I hear from our man on the Yankee ship anything alarming.” - -“Why do you take such chances?” Klinger asked surlily. “We’re in power. -The English and Americans are afraid to act without orders from home. -Hoist the flag and be done with it!” - -“Klinger,” the count replied haughtily, “as long as you keep within -your limitations as a manager of a commercial firm, grabbing land -from defenseless natives and using it to increase the income of your -company, then I am willing to listen to your advice, but when you make -bold to advise me upon matters of state, you make yourself ridiculous. -This savage kingdom is isolated from the great world,” he continued in -a more kindly tone of explanation as he saw the look of apology in the -rough overseer’s face. “The nearest cable stations are San Francisco -and Auckland; news of what has happened reached our capital before -or as soon as it was received in Washington or London. A Herzovinian -war-ship has been waiting in Auckland to bring us instructions. I do -not know the present diplomatic situation. If I hoist the flag before -the arrival of the war-ship, I may find the instructions are not to -hoist the flag. We may be on the verge of a war with our commercial -rival England over some other diplomatic difficulty, and our action -here might greatly embarrass our foreign office.” - -“But you said,” Klinger persisted, “you would hoist the flag upon the -appearance of a Yankee war-ship.” - -“The arrival of another Yankee war-ship must mean but one thing,” the -count replied patiently, “and that would be that the United States -government had decided to back the decision of the chief justice and -put Panu-Mafili on the throne by force. In that case I would have to -resign. Kataafa would either have to submit or else fight the white -sailors. If the new arrival sees our flag flying and our sailors in -possession, then the Americans and British must stop and think a long -time before they use force to drive us out of the government.” - -“And then after that if your instructions coming on our war-ship should -be not to hoist the flag?” Klinger asked. “What then?” - -“Then I shall send a war-ship to Auckland post-haste to tell what I -have done, and to wait for an answer, and then hasten back here.” The -count smiled proudly as his plan unfolded itself. “Our government -could then wait to see how the news was received. If they saw it was -embarrassing they could order the flag hauled down. If not, then it -would remain flying permanently.” - -“I have that lease of land at Tua-Tua made by Chief Moanga to the -American captain,” Klinger said jubilantly, showing the document, “and -Scott has gone across to get Moanga’s signature to one I drew up for -the ‘firm,’ and to destroy the other duplicate.” - -The count nodded. “Tua-Tua we should keep, but the United States -government may succeed in getting the island of Kulila after all. She -has had her eyes on it for many years, and doubtless thinks her claim -is first. We would not fight her for it, so unless we can win out -through diplomacy it will be hers.” - -“Little good it will do her,” Klinger said savagely, “when the Kapuan -firm owns the only water-front that is not full of quicksand.” - -The count chuckled. “We statesmen can always receive a lesson from a -clever merchant. No doubt the United States will be forced to pay a -fancy price for your land when she makes up her mind to build a naval -station there. By the way,” he added, “I thought Scott was intent upon -saving his skin, and had sailed for the Fijis.” - -“That was his intention,” Klinger replied, “but he ran into Fangaloa -Bay for water, and heard you owned the government; so he sent me word -he was staying around to get a cargo of copra, and incidentally to coax -back his mate Stump.” - -“And you sent him to Tua-Tua on a mission to Chief Moanga?” the count -asked pointedly. “What does he receive for that service?” - -“Stump,” Klinger replied. “He also got a cargo of copra to be landed in -Suva.” - -The count shook his head doubtfully. “That’s a serious business, to -seize an American and ‘shanghai’ him,” he said. - -“It will be done without force,” Klinger explained. “Stump is in our -employ. He’s trying to pay his way back to America. I’ll have him in -Fangaloa on some plantation work, and let Scott do his own shanghaiing. -Scott should be back at Fangaloa to-day unless he had trouble -persuading Moanga.” - -The portly figure of Mr. Carlson emerged from the palm and banana grove -in front of the bungalow. A few seconds later he arrived on the porch, -puffing and blowing from his exertions. As the count and the overseer -turned to greet him, none too graciously, the figure of a man unrolled -itself from the tapa draperies of a window opening on to the porch, and -silently withdrew through the kitchen in the rear. - -Stump, for it was he, held in his hand a hammer and nails, and -unconcernedly told the native cook that he would come back to make -imaginary repairs. - -After the mate had put several hundreds of yards between himself -and the governor’s house, he stopped and called down all manner of -vengeance upon Klinger’s head. Then he took a wide détour arriving -breathless at the landing, hired a boat and was soon in Commander -Tazewell’s cabin. - -While Stump retailed the conversation he had heard between the count -and Klinger, Commander Tazewell’s indignation mounted higher and -higher. When he heard of the plan to rob his government of Tua-Tua -as a coaling station and the fact that his contract had fallen into -Klinger’s hands, the commander’s brows gathered in a perplexed frown. -There must be a spy on his own ship! In no other way could the paper -have been stolen from his cabin. - -Phil, answering the commander’s summons, was soon informed of Stump’s -exciting news. - -The commander was disappointed in seeing no surprise in Phil’s face -when he heard that the Tua-Tua lease was in Klinger’s hands. - -“Then you have suspected that there is a spy on board this ship,” -the commander exclaimed incredulously, “and have not confided your -suspicions to me! I’m surprised and disappointed in you, Mr. Perry,” he -added accusingly. - -Phil flushed guiltily. “It was really not a suspicion, sir,” he -stammeringly answered, “and has only developed into a suspicion after -listening to the news Stump here brings.” - -The lad then detailed what had occurred the night the “Talofa” and -Captain Scott had entered the harbor, when he had thought he had -surprised Schultz, the captain’s orderly, endeavoring to listen to the -conversation between Commander Tazewell and the British commander. - -“His explanation, sir,” he added, “was so readily given, that I thought -I had been mistaken. Then when I learned his name was Schultz, the -suspicion returned; only that didn’t seem sufficient proof to accuse -him of spying. When you told me earlier of the loss of the lease I -again thought of Schultz, but you seemed to think the paper was only -mislaid. I’m sorry, sir,” Phil stammered in embarrassment. “I see now I -should have made a clean breast of it before.” - -“Don’t worry over that, Perry,” Commander Tazewell said kindly. -“Hindsight, you know, is always better than foresight. If I had been -you I doubt if I should have acted differently, so I have no right to -blame you. I know you are loyal, and will always act in a way that -seems to you right and straightforward.” - -Stump had been sent forward to seek out O’Neil. The captain had desired -that the mate remain on board the “Sitka” for the present, a request -which Stump was only too happy to accept. - -“The most serious part of this news,” Commander Tazewell exclaimed, “is -that it shows the whole plot unearthed, and yet I don’t see any way now -to thwart the conspirators.” - -“Where’s the ‘Sacramento’?” Phil asked excitedly. - -“At last accounts, in Honolulu, or at least expected there. She sailed -from Panama some weeks ago,” Commander Tazewell replied thoughtfully. -“There’s no cable to Honolulu, so if she is to come here, word must be -dispatched by steamer from San Francisco. If Stump has heard correctly, -the count knew that a Herzovinian war-ship was waiting in Auckland to -bring the government’s orders to annex or not to annex. That, according -to the count, would depend upon the diplomatic conditions. Of course,” -the commander added, “there can be no question of a European war over -Kapua. The thing would be impossible, and not worth the life of a -single soldier or sailor.” - -Phil shook his head, much puzzled over the situation. - -“It’s all very confusing to me, sir,” the lad said. “The personal -feelings between the Herzovinians on one side and the English and -ourselves on the other are so strongly antagonistic that I’m sure if -we were put ashore together and left there for a week we would be -fighting, although for the life of me I can’t see what it would be -about. I haven’t any personal interest in Kapua and really admire the -Herzovinians greatly, yet I am as antagonistic as any one to her -getting the islands.” - -Commander Tazewell laughed in high amusement. “Yes,” he replied, “it -is remarkable how men isolated as we are focus our minds upon local -affairs that should not really influence us. Here am I, out of cable -communication with Washington. I see this nation through private -individuals plot to take over a group of islands in which the country I -represent has one-third share. If I precipitate a fight with a foreign -power in order to retain that one-third right given us by treaty, I may -find upon receipt of mail that the government has decided to relinquish -its claim. Meanwhile through my action blood may have been spilled.” - -“Why does a government, like ours especially, so often change its mind -in these international affairs?” Phil asked. - -“It doesn’t change its mind often,” the commander smilingly replied, -“for it seldom makes up its mind. There is one thing, Mr. Perry, that -few people seem to thoroughly understand, and our government has always -disregarded. It is the relation between our international acts and our -armed forces: the army and navy. - -“If there exists a large army and a navy to back up our demands, then -the other countries will cheerfully grant them, but if the army and -navy are small and weak, then the demands are not granted.” - -Phil nodded his head. He was having explained a problem over which he -had long puzzled. - -“So you believe then that whether Herzovinia gets Kapua or loses it -depends upon the relative power of her army and navy?” he asked. - -“Exactly; if she wants to seize Kapua I don’t see any way to stop it,” -Commander Tazewell answered. “Whether she will hold it or not must -depend upon how highly England and the United States appraise the value -of the Herzovinian army and navy to back up her act. If we think she -is in earnest and will go to war rather than give up Kapua, then our -statesmen must decide what will be the advantages or disadvantages of -war to us.” - -“But,” Phil exclaimed, “she couldn’t fight both the United States and -England, all at once.” - -“There, you see, is the true value of her great army and navy,” -Commander Tazewell answered solemnly. “The two great nations might be -able to defeat her, but it would not stop there. Probably many other -nations of Europe would become involved.” - -“Then if Herzovinia had only a small army and navy,” Phil said -questioningly, “the United States or England would pay no attention to -her demands, and she would be forced to give in.” - -“That’s the whole thing in a nutshell,” the commander exclaimed. “Let -us hope, Perry,” he added, “our great nation will be sensible enough to -keep always a strong army and navy, so that we can be assured that we -can do right without the need of asking some other nation’s permission.” - -As Commander Tazewell paused he unrolled a chart and spread it before -him on the cabin table. - -“It’s nearly twenty miles from here to Fangaloa Bay,” he said after a -few minutes’ silent scrutiny of the chart of the Kapuan Islands. - -Phil was at once keenly alert. What was in Commander Tazewell’s mind? - -“I believe I am fully justified in seizing Scott and his schooner, and -with Stump a witness against him we could try him for something very -near piracy.” Commander Tazewell smiled amusedly as he regarded Phil’s -eager face, and was prepared for the lad’s earnest question. - -“Will you go there with the ship?” Phil asked. - -“No,” the commander replied. “I’m thinking of sending you on a ‘cutting -out’ expedition to bring back Scott and the schooner, either or both. -Will you accept the job?” - -Phil fairly beamed with joyful anticipation, but he composed himself -and answered: - -“I’m ready to go anywhere you send me, sir.” - -“Schultz had best be watched,” the commander added. “It’s wiser not to -show him that we suspect him. He may help us to find out something to -our advantage concerning our friends, the count and Klinger. - -“I’ll tell the executive officer to let you have the steam launch, and -he will get it ready for you beginning after dark. You can select -the men you wish to go with you. Tuamana can pilot the launch through -the reef at Fangaloa. Is there any suggestion you wish to make?” the -commander asked as Phil arose to go from the cabin. - -“I’d like to have Mr. Monroe go along to keep me company,” Phil replied -quickly, “and I thought it might be wise to go ashore now and try to -find out from Avao or Mary Hamilton whether the ‘Talofa’ has reached -Fangaloa on her return from her trip to Tua-Tua.” - -Commander Tazewell readily agreed with the lad’s suggestions. “I’ll see -you before you shove off to-night,” he said. “And don’t get hurt. Scott -and his schooner aren’t worth it.” - -Phil found Sydney and told him all the good news, and then sent for -O’Neil and Stump. - -The mate gleefully volunteered to go along. - -“Can I navigate a schooner!” he exclaimed. “Didn’t I bring her into -Ukula harbor on the darkest tropical night I ever saw with only the -white line of surf as buoys? I’ll sail her back for you, and sit on -old ‘Bully’ Scott’s face while I’m doing it.” - -“He’d be handy to show us where the gear is located, sir,” O’Neil -said approvingly, “and besides, he knows the crew and can speak their -‘lingo.’” - -The two midshipmen after having been interviewed by the executive -officer, who had come to think highly of the activity of his two young -subordinates, were set on shore and at once sought their friend, Alice -Lee, to find out what news she had gathered from her native friends. - -They found her in the hammock in the “lanai,” deep in a book. She -greeted them without reserve. - -“It’s about time you came,” she exclaimed. “I’ve been bursting with -news for you.” - -“What is it?” they both asked eagerly. - -“I tried to go up on Mission Hill this afternoon and was refused,” -Alice declared excitedly. “The count has established a ‘lookout’ -station there. I saw half a dozen Herzovinian sailors with a long -spy-glass mounted on a tripod; and I saw signal flags too,” she added. - -The midshipmen exchanged glances. - -“Looking for the ‘Sacramento,’” Sydney exclaimed. Then they told Alice -of the conversation Stump had overheard and of their mission for that -evening. - -“That isn’t all my news,” Alice said proudly. “One of the ‘Talofa’s’ -crew, a Fiji Islander, arrived in Ukula, and Klinger rode away with him -toward Saluafata. Mary Hamilton came and told me that an hour ago.” - -The two lads shook hands with each other in boyish excitement and joy, -while Alice looked on thinking they had suddenly gone crazy. - -“Don’t you see,” Phil explained to Alice’s inquiry. “Scott and his -schooner are back, and Klinger is going to get the lease and explain -that Stump will come later. We’ll catch the schooner anyway, and maybe -Scott and the lease will also be on board.” - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII - -A “CUTTING OUT” EXPEDITION - - -Four bells was struck on board the “Sitka,” as the steam launch quietly -shoved off from the gangway. - -The launch had been stripped of its bulky canopy and lay lean and low -in the water. No lights were shown, and in the darkness the little -craft hoped to leave the harbor unobserved. - -“What’s that for?” Sydney suddenly exclaimed in alarm. - -The “Sitka” had turned on all her search-lights and was sweeping them -in small arcs over the shipping and along the shore line. - -Phil chuckled. - -“Throwing sand in their eyes,” he said. “See that light held stationary -on our ‘lookout’ hill. They can’t see us with that illumination in -their faces. There’s another light playing over the Herzovinian -war-ship and another on the Matafeli district where the count lives. -It’s just a measure of safety. I heard Commander Tazewell give the -order for it as we left the cabin a few minutes ago.” - -“Those search-lights will nearly put your eyes out,” O’Neil declared. -“When I was serving in a torpedo boat destroyer during the war -manœuvers we used to run full speed toward a battle-ship after we had -sighted her steaming along with no lights showing. Then when she saw -us and turned her search-lights on us, there was nothing doing. We -couldn’t see nothing, and we didn’t know how far we were away.” - -The launch cleared the reefs at the entrance, and stood to the -eastward. The craft was under the pilotage of Chief Tuamana, who had -been delighted to aid his white friends against those he assumed to be -his enemies. A course was laid from the chart to take them clear of -the reef, and also far enough away so as not to be observed by natives -fishing along its edge. - -“Commander Tazewell especially cautioned secrecy,” Phil said, as he -directed O’Neil, who was at the helm, to give the reef a wide berth. -“We are to act only at night, and surprise old man Scott. The natives -on shore are to know nothing of our move.” - -“What’s the idea of that?” Sydney asked. - -“The fear that if the count heard we had cut out the ‘Talofa’ he might -use it as an excuse to precipitate matters, I suppose,” Phil replied. -“He could give the episode vivid coloring and claim he had hoisted -his nation’s flag to prevent the high-handed and lawless acts of the -American and English naval commanders. It would sound well to those -who didn’t know all the particulars. Of course,” Phil added, “another -reason is that if we are seen, Scott may be informed and might resist -us by force, and then the situation wouldn’t be so simple; especially -if he should use natives of Kataafa’s side to resist us.” - -Sydney contemplated in silence the gunner’s mate at his side who was -critically examining a machine gun on its portable tripod. - -“The executive seems to have supplied us with enough force to overcome -resistance,” the midshipman declared quietly. “A machine gun and ten -sailors with rifles should easily overpower Captain Scott and his crew.” - -Stump had listened in silence. Hearing Sydney’s observation he joined -in the conversation. - -“You’ll need all you’ve got to get ahead of ‘Bully’ Scott,” he -exclaimed wagging his head sagely, “unless you surprise him. This here -‘Bully’ Scott is a tough man to go fooling with. I seen him lay out -nearly a dozen natives in the Solomon Islands. They were all trying -to kill him with head knives and war clubs. He’s a dead shot with a -revolver, and he usually carries two of them.” - -“I reckon he will not resist us, Stump,” Phil said confidently. “We -represent the law, you see, and if he hurts any one, he’ll be liable to -a long term in jail.” - -Stump laughed mirthlessly. - -“He’s entitled to that already,” he exclaimed. “That’s why he wants -to lay his hands on me. And if he should,” the mate added with an -involuntary shiver, “the ‘Talofa’ would arrive at its next port and -‘Bully’ Scott with tears in his eyes would tell of the loss of his dear -friend Stump, drowned at sea.” - -“What’s the plan, Phil?” Sydney asked some time later. - -“We go first to Fangaloa Bay. If the ‘Talofa’s’ there we simply seize -her and every one on board and take her back to Ukula harbor,” Phil -replied. - -“That sounds simple enough,” O’Neil declared, “and, Mr. Perry, it’ll -be just as easy as saying it. Only,” he added jokingly, “we’ll have to -keep our eyes on Stump. He’s likely to get mixed up with his old friend -and shipmate ‘Bully’ Scott.” - -The night was extremely dark, but the thunder of the surf on the reef -guided them in keeping beyond that peril. The land loomed dark on the -starboard hand, while overhead a brilliant starry sky accentuated the -blackness of the night. Ashore, bright lights sprang up from time to -time, revealing the location of native villages along the beach. - -Tuamana, a cape of native cloth slung picturesquely over his shoulders, -stood silently beside O’Neil. The chief’s eyes were continually upon -the shore line. He was for the most part silent, but would occasionally -turn to Phil, pointing to a group of lights ashore or to a deeper -shadow against the loom of the land and inform him shortly of their -bearings. - -“Saluafata,” he said as the thunder of the breaking surf grew louder -and a ghastly whiteness appeared on the bow. - -Phil glanced at his watch. “Eleven thirty,” he said. “We’re about -half-way.” - -Most of the crew had curled themselves down in the bottom of the boat -and lay motionless. Phil envied them. Even with the prospect of a hand -to hand fight, against what odds they could not know, their healthy -minds were wrapped in sleep. - -“What brought Captain Scott back, Stump?” Phil asked after an unbroken -silence of some minutes. “He was supposed to have left the islands -after landing the guns.” - -“Klinger said Scott heard that the Herzovinians owned the government, -and that he was therefore safe to come and get his copra,” Stump -answered. “But I know that he’s looking for me. I know too much. I’ve -seen more than one poor black boy kicked overboard when Scott was in -one of his wild fits of anger.” - -“Why have you stayed so long with such a brute?” Sydney asked. - -“Well, sir,” Stump replied, “I reckon I was always too scared to run -away. And then,” he added fearfully, “I’ve got a few things to answer -for, too. I was driven to ’em, but before a court that don’t count. I -hain’t got murder, though,” he declared. “’Tain’t in no way as bad as -that. Captain Scott swears I shoved a black boy overboard in a gale of -wind, but ’fore God, it was an accident, and I asked to lower a boat -and go after him, but Scott wouldn’t let me. I’ve done with it, and am -willing to take whatever medicine is coming.” - -“Fangaloa,” Tuamana grunted, pointing to the dim outline of a high -cone-shaped mountain looming up on the starboard hand. - -The word soon spread among the sleeping forms, and presently all were -keenly alert. The gunner’s mate had secured his machine gun to be -prepared to rake the enemy with a withering fire in case of opposition. - -The launch turned between two bold headlands and steered for the dark -land. They were running into a long narrow arm of the sea--the Bay of -Fangaloa, a mile wide and three miles deep. - -Every eye was strained ahead, gazing for the schooner. There were but -few lights on the distant beach. Most of the natives were long ago in -bed. - -Quietly the sailors had taken their stations. Each carried only a -revolver; for night use rifles are less effective. Phil and Sydney -stood side by side ready to lead their men on board the “Talofa.” The -darkness was intense. The bold and densely wooded mountains rising -precipitously above them cast a deep shadow over the waters of the bay. - -A satisfied grunt from Tuamana was the first news that their quarry had -been located. The chiefs keen eyes had perceived the ghostly outline of -a sail. In a few minutes all recognized the schooner, lying near the -extreme end of the bay. Her great mainsail was set and its whiteness -against the land had first revealed her presence. - -No one spoke. The steam launch had been slowed in speed, and all -precautions taken to assure surprise. The fireman ceaselessly watched -his boiler to prevent a sudden escape of steam and the machinist used -oil freely to prevent the slightest machinery squeak which might reveal -their presence. - -In silence, except for the slight churn of the propeller and the swirl -of water thrown from the bow of the launch in its progress, O’Neil -steered straight for the black hull now distinctly outlined scarcely -five hundred yards away. No lights were visible on the schooner--a good -sign. The crew were either all asleep or ashore. - -The launch, with its engine stopped, swung alongside. Ready hands -made her fast, and a moment after the deserted decks were held by the -Americans. - -“You look out for the forward hatch,” Phil ordered Sydney. “O’Neil, -take a half dozen men with Stump, and make sail. Tell the launch to -take a line and tow us out of the bog.” - -Phil with two sailors moved toward the cabin ladder. He gazed below -into forbidding blackness. - -“I wonder if Scott is down there?” he exclaimed. “If he is he will soon -be up when he feels his ship under way.” - -Phil heard the sound of the capstan as O’Neil and his men began to -weigh the anchor. Then the squeak of gear grinding through unoiled -blocks gave proof that the foresail and head-sails were being set. -Soon a slight jar and the louder noise of the churning of the launch’s -propeller told him the schooner was under way, and then slowly she -moved through the quiet water of the bay toward the sea. - -“Keep watch here,” Phil said to his two men. Then with his revolver -in hand he slowly, cautiously descended the ladder. Stories told of -this pirate Scott came into his mind. At the bottom the darkness was -oppressive. Phil endeavored to listen for the breathing of the man he -sought, but his own heart-beats deafened him. He did not know which way -to turn. Where were the sleeping quarters? - -He fumbled in his pockets and drew forth a box of matches. Then -quickly striking one he held it above his head. He was in a small -cabin containing a table and a few leathered bunks. A door opened to -his right. Advancing he held the match before him. He saw the small -room was a stateroom, but it was empty. Captain Scott was not on board -the ship. Disappointedly he mounted the ladder and turned his steps -forward. - -Sydney and O’Neil had aroused the crew, six men in all, and had -employed them hauling on ropes. Stump was talking with a tall native as -Phil approached. - -“Captain Scott isn’t in the cabin,” he informed his companions; “but we -have his vessel, anyway.” - -“Did you go down there alone?” Stump exclaimed incredulously. - -“I certainly did,” Phil replied, laughing half nervously at the evident -surprise in Stump’s voice, “and my heart’s still racing like that steam -launch engine.” - -“Mine would have stopped,” Stump declared. “I’m glad he ain’t on board. -I never want to see the old pirate again until I see him hanged.” - -“What does his crew say?” Phil asked. - -“This is Maka,” Stump said indicating the tall native. “Captain Scott, -he says, went ashore to meet Klinger somewhere, he doesn’t know where, -and left word he’d sail in the morning.” - -“Well, he won’t.” Phil chuckled. “Gee! I’d like to see his face when he -arrives and sees no schooner.” - -The little steam launch toiled away, dragging its huge burden toward -the sea. - -“It’s two o’clock,” Phil said looking at his watch by the light of a -lantern. “There will be little wind before morning, and then it will -probably be offshore. I think we’d better have the launch tow us well -clear of the reefs before we attempt to haul aft the sheets.” - -O’Neil nodded in agreement. - -“We’ll have to arrange watches,” Phil said. “I’m overpowered with sleep -myself, and I suppose we all are in about the same condition. We’ve -four of us to stand watch. I insist on standing the first hour, then -I’ll call you, Syd.” - -O’Neil protested: “Excuse me, sir. You and Mr. Monroe are young and -need lots of sleep. I couldn’t sleep if I tried. Stump here sometimes -stays awake for days at a time. It’s all a matter of habit, this -sleeping is. Now, please, you gentlemen go and turn in, and I’ll call -you if anything happens that you ought to know of.” - -Phil was really too sleepy to protest vigorously, so he and Sydney -curled down on mattresses, brought up from Scott’s cabin, and were -soon sound asleep. - -When Phil woke the sun was high up and the “Talofa” was under sail. The -steam launch raced along several hundred yards away. The breeze was -light and the water smooth. - -“There’s smoke out there on the horizon,” O’Neil said as he came aft, -looking as fresh as if he had slept the whole night through. “There -ain’t any steamer expected, is there, sir?” - -Phil shook his head. “Not for another week, anyway,” he replied -excitedly. Then he gazed toward the land. “We’re twenty miles from -shore, at least,” he added. - -“The wind’s offshore, but the trade wind will be stronger out here when -it starts up, and we can then make Ukula in one leg,” O’Neil replied. - -Phil considered for several minutes. Was the smoke a Herzovinian -war-ship or was it the “Sacramento”? If it was the latter it would be -of great service to the admiral on board to know the conditions in -Kapua before he was sighted by the watchful sailors on Mission Hill. -If it turned out to be the other war-ship no harm could be done by -taking a look at it. - -“Bear up, O’Neil, and run down and investigate,” Phil said quietly. -“Hail the launch and tell her to proceed toward Ukula, but keep outside -until we catch up, and watch us for signals.” - -With the wind free the fast schooner fairly skimmed over the water, -racing toward the curl of smoke barely distinguishable. - -“Smoke down here means something,” O’Neil said as he returned with -Stump after seeing that all the running gear was properly belayed and -the sails trimmed. Then he added cheerfully, “We’ll be eating breakfast -at the expense of our absent friend Captain Scott in a few minutes. -Stump knows where he keeps his eatables, and we’ve got a seaman with us -who can make as good coffee as you can buy in a first-class ‘Frisco’ -hotel.” - -It seemed ages to the anxious Americans before the small speck of a -hull appeared beneath the curl of misty smoke. - -“She’s painted white,” O’Neil exclaimed as he handed the binoculars to -Phil. The midshipmen each took a look, then shook their heads. She was -too far away. “Imagination, O’Neil,” Sydney suggested. - -“Another fifteen minutes and we’ll know for sure,” Sydney said -nervously. “I hope it’s the ‘Sacramento.’” - -The steam launch had disappeared, swallowed up against the background -of the high mountains of the island. - -Slowly the speck on the horizon took shape. Anxiously the Americans -watched, each eager to recognize some outline that would tell them -whether the strange vessel was flying their flag or that of the power -which to all intents and purposes was their rival, if not enemy. - -“What will you do,” Sydney asked Phil excitedly, “if she’s not the -‘Sacramento’?” - -Phil glanced aloft at the straining canvas. The wind had come out -at southeast, and on the sea whitecaps of foam were here and there -appearing. He knew that within the hour or even less a strong trade -wind would be blowing fair for Ukula harbor. - -“We’ll try to beat her in,” he replied, “and announce her coming to -Commander Tazewell. But,” he added hopelessly, “what can he do? We -are too weak now to oppose the count’s government, and with this -reënforcement our chances will be hopeless.” - -“It’s the ‘Sacramento,’ all right!” O’Neil exclaimed. “See those big -bow sponsons for her guns. It’s all over but the shouting now for -friend Kataafa! He’ll be doing a foot-race for his summer capital, and -the count will be taking a voyage in a war-ship for his health!” - -No doubt longer existed. O’Neil’s brisk summing up of the events of -the future brought a smile of relief to the lips of the midshipmen. -Phil gazed long and earnestly at the approaching war-ship. She had -apparently altered her course and was now heading down directly for -them. - -A few moments later a puff of smoke was seen ejected from the high -forecastle and a muffled report was heard some dozen seconds later--the -universal message of the sea, announcing, “I desire to communicate.” - -The big war-ship, her decks crowded with curious sailors, lay -motionless in the water as the schooner “hove to” close alongside. - -Phil had answered the hail and reported he had information of -importance for the admiral. - -A boat shot down from the “Sacramento’s” davits, and was soon alongside -the “Talofa.” - -O’Neil tended the boat line and good-naturedly chaffed the inquisitive -boat’s crew. - -“We’re doing a little buccaneering, that’s all,” he answered an eager -inquiry as to their mission. “The islanders are fighting between -themselves. You fellows came just at the right time. Say,” he added, -“did you see anything of a Herzovinian war-ship heading this way, -burning up the paint on her bottom?” - -The coxswain of the whale-boat declared that the schooner was the only -sail they had sighted since leaving Honolulu, nearly two weeks ago. - -“It’s a big ocean, ain’t it?” O’Neil said thoughtfully. - -Phil stepped down into the whale-boat and was soon being rowed across -to the war-ship. The admiral wished to hear the news directly and from -Phil in person. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX - -A REËNFORCEMENT - - -Rear Admiral Spotts, whose flag was flown at the masthead of the -cruiser “Sacramento,” wasted no time in drawing from Phil the complete -story of everything that had happened in Kapua. - -The captain of the flag-ship and the admiral’s flag-lieutenant were -both present in the cabin and followed the lad’s narrative with great -interest and amazement. - -Phil told of the decision by the chief justice for Panu-Mafili, and -then the attack upon Ukula by Kataafa and his warriors, armed with guns -purchased apparently from the Kapuan firm, of the appointment of Count -Rosen as governor, and the appeal for annexation to Herzovinia. - -“I think I can now see,” the admiral declared, “why the Washington -government sent a revenue cutter post-haste from San Francisco to -Honolulu to order me to proceed with my flag-ship to Kapua. A great -wrong,” he added earnestly, “has been done the treaty, and my duty is -clearly to set it right, by force if necessary. I shall consider this -Count Rosen an adventurer. - -“Yet,” he said after a few thoughtful minutes, “you say the count is -prepared against my coming. When those of the ‘de facto’ government -see our ship approaching, they are ready to take the responsibility of -hoisting the Herzovinian flag over Kapua. Then I shall be powerless; -only an order from Herzovinia can remove the badge of annexation. What -we do after that will not be an act against the government of Kapua. It -will be against the sovereignty of Herzovinia.” - -A plan had suddenly flashed through Phil’s mind. The admiral was quick -to see the sudden eagerness in the midshipman’s face. A kindly smile -spread slowly over his own grizzled countenance. - -“You have something rash and daring in mind, I am sure,” he said, half -in amusement, but half seriously. “You have the local color and -inspiration of contact. Tell us your plan.” - -[Illustration: “IS IT QUITE CLEAR?” THE ADMIRAL ASKED] - -The humor of the situation suddenly struck Phil, and he blushed to the -roots of his hair. “Pardon me, sir, for being so bold,” he replied -apologetically. “The same thing must have also struck you, sir, and -that is the ‘Sacramento’ must enter Ukula harbor at night and secretly -and Commander Tazewell must meanwhile prevent the hoisting of the -Herzovinian flag.” - -All three of his hearers gave an ungrudging assent. The admiral took -out his watch. “It’s now a little after one o’clock,” he said. “We are -thirty odd miles from Ukula. You can probably be there by dark. I’ll -enter the harbor at ten o’clock to-night and shall have my entire force -of three hundred men ashore within ten minutes after we anchor. Tell -Commander Tazewell I shall leave all details to him, for he knows the -situation better than I. Tell him my decision is to uphold the law of -the chief justice under the existing treaty until our government orders -me to do otherwise.” - -Phil thrilled with joyful excitement as he listened to the admiral’s -quiet but decided voice. - -“Is it quite clear?” the admiral asked. - -“Perfectly, sir,” Phil assured him. - -“Then I must speed the parting guest.” The admiral smiled, and put out -his hand. - -Phil shook the hand warmly. - -“Happy is he who brings young men to his council table,” the admiral -quoted. - -With Phil on board, the “Talofa” lost no time in squaring away for -Ukula. The “Sacramento” was seen to turn and head out to sea, so as -not to be in danger of discovery from shore. Phil told the plan to his -shipmates. - -“That’s a corker!” O’Neil exclaimed gleefully. “There’s just one -thing you haven’t mentioned,” he added seriously. “They’ll see the -‘Sacramento’ coming in from the pilot station and maybe from Mission -Hill. The Herzovinian war-ship will also be on the lookout.” - -Phil nodded. “Yes,” he said questioningly. - -“Then, sir,” the sailorman declared, “we must prevent those at the -pilot station sending the news, and blind the other two. A couple of -our men can fix the pilot station, and our search-lights can do the -rest. They can’t see the cruisers with those big glims in their eyes.” - -“Fine suggestion, O’Neil,” Phil exclaimed. “I’ll certainly give it -to the captain. And by the way, I have a thought,” he added eagerly, -as the “Talofa” raced toward the distant land, all sails spank full -and sheets straining. “We’ll get on board the launch, leaving the -‘Talofa’ outside to come in later after dark. It will create less -curiosity. Stump and a couple of men can hold her.” He looked at Sydney -questioningly. “I reckon, Syd,” he said apologetically, “you’ll have to -miss the fun on shore and stand by the schooner.” - -Although the midshipman felt somewhat disappointed he did not show it. - -“That’s natural,” he said. “I’ll bring her in after dark, all right, -and be in time in case there’s a row.” - -They found the steam launch awaiting them about fifteen miles from the -harbor, and quickly transferred to her all but Sydney, Stump and two -sailors, who remained to sail the schooner into Ukula. - -“Don’t pile her on the reef,” Phil cautioned banteringly, as the steam -launch shoved off from the “Talofa’s” side and headed at full speed for -Ukula. - -“We should be in by five o’clock,” Phil said as he looked at his watch. -“Now,” he added, “these are going to be exciting times, eh, O’Neil? I -wonder what’s coming out of it all?” - -“It looks as if that count was getting cold feet,” the boatswain’s mate -replied. “If he’d had more nerve the Herzovinian flag would have been -flying on the flagstaff at Kulinuu right now.” - -Phil shook his head. “It’s a pretty big undertaking to annex a kingdom -unless you are sure you’re going to be backed up,” he said. - -“It didn’t take our admiral long to make up his mind,” O’Neil reminded. -“And he doesn’t know he’s going to be backed up, either.” - -“That’s different,” Phil replied. “He is only restoring a king to a -throne under a law that he considers yet binding. And he has sufficient -force to do it.” - -Chief Tuamana had shown evident and outward signs of great joy when -Phil told him that the American admiral was going to uphold the chief -justice’s decision, and passing a big Kapuan canoe filled with -natives, the delighted chief raised his voice to taunt his enemies, -some of whom he recognized, when Phil by main force drew him down and -told him forcefully to keep his counsel to himself. - -“They’re just like schoolboys with a secret, sir,” O’Neil said. “Those -natives are on their way home, aren’t they?” he asked of Tuamana. The -launch was not over three miles from the harbor. The “Talofa’s” sail -was barely in sight on the horizon. - -The chief shook his head. - -“Going to Vaileli for a dance,” he answered in very broken English. -“Chief Tuatele is there in that boat; he ask me to go along. He make -fun of me.” The chief grunted in contempt. - -“Do you mean there’s going to be a big Siva-Siva there to-night?” Phil -asked eagerly. - -Tuamana replied in the affirmative. “This day big day at Vaileli -plantation. Very big ‘Siva-Siva’ and ‘Talola.’”[38] - -As they drew nearer the harbor they saw large numbers of war canoes -filled with natives, all dressed in gala attire, paddling out through -the break in the reef, confirming Tuamana’s information. - -“That’s a lucky stroke,” Phil exclaimed. “Probably the count and -Klinger will both be at the Vaileli plantation, and if so, there’ll be -no trouble carrying out the admiral’s plan. I’m going to find out for -sure,” he added as an extra large canoe holding nearly forty men and -women passed them, its crew shouting and singing in high glee. - -“Run up close,” Phil said quietly to O’Neil. Then to Tuamana, “Say -nothing of our plans,” he cautioned, “only find out what’s actually -going to happen.” - -The canoe paddlers stopped their efforts and waited. Twoscore eager -smiling faces were turned upon the Americans, and from all the musical -greeting of “Talofa, Alii” was given. - -Tuamana rose and with solemn dignity spoke to the people in the canoe. -He was answered by an elderly warrior sitting in the stern of the -canoe. Both Tuamana and the Kataafa warrior addressed maintained a -haughty but dignified bearing toward each other. - -Finally Tuamana nodded, and the old patriarch gave a command. The song -again broke forth, and in perfect time the paddles were dipped and the -canoe shot on her way. - -“All Ukula go Vaileli, to-night,” Tuamana said, after the launch had -again been headed for the harbor. “Big ‘Talola’ and ‘Siva’ to Missi -Klinger.” - -“Fine business!” O’Neil exclaimed. “They’ll come back in the morning to -find a new king at Kulinuu.” - -“Kataafa go too,” the chief added. - -Phil could hardly suppress his joy. Things were certainly coming their -way. - -As Phil ascended the ladder of the “Sitka,” Commander Tazewell -anxiously awaited him. But before the commander could ask a question, -Phil hurriedly but guardedly outlined the news, and followed his -captain into his cabin. - -“Schultz has deserted us,” the captain told him. “He got ashore during -the night--probably let himself down over the side into a waiting -canoe. So you can speak out.” Phil had been conversing in guarded tones. - -The entire situation from beginning to end was discussed, the executive -officer and most of the important officers of the cruiser being -present. - -“The ‘Sacramento’ will be here at ten o’clock,” Commander Tazewell said -after all points had been discussed. “Captain Sturdy and his British -sailors will hold all roads leading into Ukula west of the Mulivaii -River while we garrison Matautu to that river. A squad will take care -of the pilot station, and guards must be furnished all the consulates -in Matautu.” - -All listened eagerly. The time all had looked forward to was fast -approaching. - -“Lieutenant Morrison will command our men,” the captain added, as -he rose to his feet in sign of dismissal. “We may of course have -opposition, but we must guard against precipitating the fighting. Our -duty is only to hold and not to advance. When the admiral arrives he -will of course tell us what to do next. - -“Tents, rations and supplies will be landed to-night after the sailors -are ashore,” he added. - -Phil remained behind after the officers had filed out of the cabin, -having been detained by a word from his captain. - -“I want you to take the news to Mr. Lee at once,” Commander Tazewell -said to the lad, “and show him the necessity for secrecy. No one must -know until we are ashore.” - -Phil made himself presentable, and then was conveyed to the shore by -the captain’s boat, which on its return carried a letter from Commander -Tazewell, addressed to Commander Sturdy of the British war-ship, -acquainting him of the change in the situation and the plan for the -night. - -Mr. Lee and Judge Lindsay were both jubilant over the turn of affairs, -while Alice fairly danced with joy. Miss Lee, quiet and dignified, -rather shrank from the thought of possible bloodshed. There was only -one drop of bitterness in Alice’s joy. Phil insisted that Avao should -not be told until after the “Sacramento” had entered the harbor, and -landed her men. He feared the fatal custom of women’s gossip among the -Kapuans. - -“I sincerely hope this strong stand of our admiral will have the -required effect, and that we shall have no further bloodshed,” Mr. Lee -said solemnly. - -“There can be no lasting peace in Kapua, Lee,” the judge exclaimed -earnestly, “so long as the islands are administered by three rapacious -beasts and animals of prey. A lion and two eagles can never act in -harmony. It is best for the people that only one should govern. -Herzovinia has the greatest interests on this island; she should govern -it. Our presence is but a stick in the molasses.” - -“I agree with you in principle, judge,” Mr. Lee replied, “but even -you are not willing to see one nation, in deliberate disregard of the -treaty rights of others, seize what is not hers.” - -“That, my dear sir, is not a matter of politics, but of morals,” the -judge answered. “Let us decide the justice of the situation; but after -that is determined then I am anxious to see this triple government at -an end.” - -When Phil left the consulate the two officials were yet deep in their -discussion. As he hurried toward the landing he noted that the town -was almost deserted of the usual crowd that gathered along the main -thoroughfare at this time of the early evening. The “Talola” at Vaileli -was going to be popular. - -As Phil’s boat rounded to alongside of the gangway, the “Talofa” had -just anchored within a few cables’ length of the “Sitka.” - -Preparations were being carried forward with great expedition on board -both the American and British war-ships, but everything was being done -so quietly that no suspicion had so far been aroused on board the other -cruiser anchored only a short distance away from each of the allies. - -As the ship’s bell sounded two strokes (nine o’clock) a long line of -boats filled with armed sailors shoved off from the two ships and were -towed by steam launches swiftly toward the shore. Phil and Sydney -accompanied Commander Tazewell in their towing steam launch. The -“Talofa” had been turned over to a squad of sailormen under a petty -officer, to prevent the native crew from attempting to take her out of -the harbor. - -Phil’s eyes were upon the dark outlines of the Herzovinian war-ship -as they passed close alongside of her. There was a grim smile of -satisfaction in Commander Tazewell’s face as he heard loud voices -raised in the guttural Herzovinian tongue, apparently the officer of -the watch berating the men on lookout for their slackness. Then came -a hurrying of footsteps upon the deck and finally a hail in broken -English. - -“Is there trouble on shore?” the voice called hesitatingly. - -Commander Tazewell waited several seconds before replying. - -Once more the voice was raised, this time more loudly. He had -apparently just discovered a second line of boats on the other side of -his ship, ladened deeply in the water with sailormen. - -“Has there been a fight on shore? Why are you landing your men?” - -“Just a precautionary measure,” Commander Tazewell’s clear-cut voice -answered. “Is your captain on board?” - -“No, sir,” came back the answer. “He has gone to Vaileli.” - -“It’s no matter,” Commander Tazewell replied. “When he returns I will -explain everything to him.” - -“Thank you, sir,” said the voice, but it was plainly noted that the -speaker was greatly perplexed. - -“Only a young officer left on board,” Commander Tazewell said quietly -to the midshipmen, “and taken off his guard, he doesn’t know what to -do.” - -“What could he do?” Phil asked excitedly. - -Commander Tazewell shook his head doubtfully. “He might land his men -too, but that could not defeat our purpose. With the English and -American sailors in military control of Ukula, it would take a stronger -man than Count Rosen to annex the islands.” - -The boats glided alongside the wharf at the foot of the Siumu road and -the sailors, their accouterments rattling musically, scrambled upon the -dock and quickly formed their companies. But few commands were given. -Each officer knew his station already. - -The English commander, fairly beaming with joy, joined Commander -Tazewell on the dock. - -“I say, that admiral of yours is a jolly good sport, and we’re behind -him with every man and gun,” he exclaimed effusively, “and we’re not -much beforehand, either,” he added. “The natives all say that the -Vaileli ‘Talola’ was arranged by Count Rosen in order to inform -Kataafa and his warriors that the islands will be annexed as soon as -their war-ship, hourly expected, arrives. It’s a sort of informal -annexation, don’t you know. And they’ll come back and then, as you -Americans say, they’ll ‘wake up.’” - -Commander Tazewell joined in the laugh. The dock was clear. All the men -landed had gone to their stations, and their boats had been towed back -to their ships to be filled with tentage and provisions. - -“By now,” he said grimly, “there probably are many eager messengers -hurrying to acquaint those at Vaileli of what is happening on the beach -of Ukula.” - -Phil was suddenly aware of Avao’s presence at his elbow. - -“Kataafa’s men all take guns,” she whispered guardedly. “Mary Hamilton, -she go too to Vaileli. What are sailors going to do?” she asked -excitedly. - -“You’ll see to-morrow, Avao,” Phil replied evasively. - -“Too few men,” Avao persisted anxiously. “Kataafa many thousand.” - -“What does she say?” Commander Tazewell asked, suddenly noting the -eagerness in the girl’s manner. - -Avao repeated what she had told Phil. - -“We’ll have about three hundred more inside a half hour, Avao,” -Commander Tazewell assured her. “Don’t you think we can stand off an -attack with those?” - -“Fa’a moli-moli,”[39] she said humbly; “but, Alii, I know my people, -and I afraid bad men may tell them fight. Suppose I go to the count and -say do not permit armed natives to come to-night back to Ukula. If they -come maybe have big fight.” - -“There seems to be something in what the girl says, Tazewell,” -Commander Sturdy exclaimed. “Of course our plan is to refuse them -entrance, and open fire if they persist. Yet we’d like to prevent a -fight if we can win without it.” - -Commander Tazewell remained silently thoughtful for several minutes. To -him the plan savored too much of asking the count a favor. However, it -was in the cause of humanity. If word was to be sent the girl could not -take it alone. An officer from his command must go. He turned his eyes -toward the midshipmen, standing silently awaiting the decision. - -“Perry, will you go to the count at Vaileli plantation?” he said -quietly. “Explain the situation and see if he will agree to prevent -bloodshed. To-morrow we can treat with him. Monroe,” he added -hurriedly, “please take my gig and tell the executive officer of the -‘Sitka’ about using the search-lights beginning at fifteen minutes of -ten.” - -Sydney saluted, gulped down his disappointment and turned toward the -waiting boat. He had been on the point of asking to go with Phil. - -“You and Avao can get mounts at the consulate,” Commander Tazewell -continued, turning to Phil, who stood like a sprinter ready to run or a -hunting dog about to be unleashed. - - - - -CHAPTER XX - -THE TABLES TURNED - - -Alice helped Phil and Avao saddle two of her father’s ponies. - -Time was too precious for conversation, and Phil spoke only in -monosyllables, much to Alice’s disgust. - -“We are going to the plantation house at Vaileli,” he had told her, -“but just what we expect to accomplish I don’t exactly know.” - -As he gave a last tug at the girth bands of the two animals, and lifted -Avao on to her side-saddle, he looked about for Alice, but she had -disappeared into the darkness of the stable. - -“Come on, Avao,” he exclaimed eagerly; “we’ve got to do the entire -distance on a run if our ponies can stand it.” He shook loose his reins -after leaping into the saddle and dug his heels into the pony’s flanks. -The pony, believing it meant a race, sprang smartly forward with an -eager whinny of delight, and away he raced through the gate of the -consulate. Avao followed only a few lengths behind. - -They had gone several miles at a rapid pace, when it became evident -that a third horseman was following. - -Phil was greatly disturbed when Alice, mounted on her father’s -Australian horse, a larger and much sturdier breed than the native -pony, drew up beside them. - -“I have learned enough not to ask permission when I want to go with -you,” she exclaimed between breaths. “Now, don’t be angry. I’m in no -danger from the natives.” - -They found the road deserted. The villages through which they passed at -breakneck speed were dark and empty. - -“Look,” Avao exclaimed. “Vaileli!” - -A bright light, apparently caused by a huge fire, had sprung into view -not far distant. As they raced forward they now passed on the road -natives, singly and in twos and threes, hurrying toward the scene of -festivity. - -At the massive stone gateway leading into the plantation, the three -drew rein and allowed their gasping ponies to walk. - -As they drew nearer they saw that many fires had been kindled. The -great space in front of the plantation house was flooded with light, -about which hundreds of men and women had gathered. All were in gala -attire. Each of the warriors carried his precious gun, with his -cartridge belt of webbed material worn jauntily over his naked shoulder. - -“Where shall I find the count?” Phil asked. - -Avao fearlessly greeted the people, who gazed in amazement at the -intruders. She called many by name and they, like children, soon -forgetting their grievance, smiled back and bade her welcome. - -“The count is at the house, they say,” the girl answered Phil’s -question. - -“You and Avao remain mounted,” Phil said, as they approached the low -bungalow of the plantation, used as a residence for the manager and his -white overseers. He noted that the wide porch was crowded with people -dressed in white, and as he got closer he recognized the count’s strong -figure with the high chief Kataafa standing beside him. - -The great delicacy of his mission suddenly flashed upon him. Here -were gathered nearly five thousand warriors, all armed with modern -rifles. The power represented was in the hands of the two men before -him. They could by one word hurl the entire assemblage upon the sailors -now ashore in Ukula. Then another face appeared in the crowd, the -sphynx-like countenance of “Bully” Scott, the man whose schooner Phil -had taken. Did he know! - -Throwing his horse’s reins to Avao, Phil slipped from his saddle and -advanced up the steps of the porch. The count received him with but -scant courtesy. No attempt was made to hide his displeasure. Phil knew -that all eyes were upon him, and felt their hostile stare. It was a -situation calculated to disconcert the boldest. Phil steeled himself to -hide his great nervousness. - -“I come from my captain.” He heard his own voice as if from a long way -off. There was an ominous silence all about him. “My message is for -your ear alone, Count Rosen,” he said. - -A deep frown of annoyance furrowed the count’s brow. - -“Isn’t this time inopportune?” he exclaimed angrily. - -Phil appreciated that every moment was valuable. The news of the -landing of the sailors was on the way. The runners that they had passed -on the road were probably bringing the unwelcome tidings. - -“It is of the highest importance,” the lad replied tensely. “Otherwise -you must know that my captain would not have sent me at this time.” - -Phil noted a suspicion of alarm in the count’s face. Suddenly a buzz -of excitement disturbed the quiet, and Phil, glancing about quickly, -following people’s gaze, saw the flash of search-lights from the -direction of Ukula. - -“That is what I have come to explain,” Phil added, gaining confidence. -The “Sacramento” was entering the harbor. In a few minutes, the -admiral had said, three hundred sailors would be on shore to reënforce -Commander Tazewell’s men. - -The count without other than a sign to follow him turned and entered -the house. - -In a room giving off from the hall, and lighted only by a single oil -lamp, he stopped and motioned Phil to speak. - -“An American admiral has arrived, and all the American and English -sailors and marines are now holding Ukula. Commander Tazewell begs -that you will use your good offices to prevent useless bloodshed. Your -warriors must not attempt to return to-night. To-morrow the admiral -will hold council, and invites you to come to arrange a peaceful -settlement. That is all, sir,” Phil added finally. - -The count’s face was livid, while the hand that pulled his long -moustache shook like an aspen. Words for once failed him. He knew that -he had played and lost. - -Footsteps from the hall heralded the approach of others. Phil’s heart -sank. Had the news of the landing of the sailors already come? Klinger -and Scott had entered the room. Phil gazed at them, but saw only -displeasure in their faces. The greeting he had been about to give was -withheld. - -Finally the count spoke. His voice was husky. The blow had been severe. - -“I’ll do what I can. Now go!” He half shoved Phil out of the room. “No -earthly power can save you if you are not away before that savage horde -out there has learned this insult to their king.” - -Phil half stumbled down the steps and flung himself into the saddle. - -“Ride fast, Avao,” he ordered sharply, “straight for the gate, and, -Alice, you follow her. Go on, faster, faster.” He herded them before -him. - -The natives in their path quickly got out of their way and called after -them “Faimalosi,”[40] thinking that they were only enjoying a pony race. - -Before they had reached the gate of the plantation the news of the -landing of the sailors had arrived. - -“They have heard from Ukula,” Alice called from over her shoulder, -indicating a group of armed natives squatting by the side of the road -feasting upon fruit stripped from trees in their near vicinity, “and -are wondering what it means.” Even as she spoke to Phil, one of the -group called out questioningly to Avao. The native girl tossed back an -answer and her words apparently were satisfactory and caused a laugh. - -Phil heaved a sigh of relief as they swung through the gate. By mutual -consent their horses were slowed to a trot, and the three drew close -together to converse. - -“What did the count say?” Alice questioned eagerly. - -“He promised he’d do what he could,” Phil replied, his voice unsteady -from the recent excitement. “I’m afraid the ‘Frankenstein’ he has -created has grown beyond his control. We’re bound to have war.” - -When Phil and his companions arrived in Ukula the town resembled -an armed camp. The roads leading to the village were all strongly -held. Machine guns and field pieces had been mounted behind hastily -constructed barricades. The main strength of the forces was encamped -in the town proper between the two streams. The British sailors were -in garrison at Kulinuu. The cruiser “Sacramento” had anchored in a -commanding position with her heavy broadside bearing upon the town. - -Phil found Commander Tazewell and the admiral at the Tivoli Hotel, -where the latter had taken up his headquarters, and gave them an -account of his mission. - -“We must not relax vigilance,” Admiral Spotts said, while Phil saluted, -ready to withdraw. “I believe that no hostilities will be thought of -until to-morrow. Then we shall see what can be done through diplomacy -to avoid bloodshed.” - -Phil and Sydney occupied that night their old room in the consulate. - -“When I got on board and gave the executive officer the captain’s -message about the search-lights,” Sydney said, after Phil had -graphically told of the trip to Vaileli and of the great gathering of -armed warriors, “he looked queerly at me and exclaimed, ‘Why, he told -me that himself the last minute before leaving the ship.’ So, you see, -the captain must have thought there was danger, and didn’t want to risk -us both.” - -“It would be a terrible loss,” Phil exclaimed laughingly. - -The next morning Count Rosen and Klinger rode through town back to -their homes in the Matafeli district. - -At ten o’clock the American admiral and his officers, in full dress -uniform and accompanied by the American and English consuls and Judge -Lindsay, proceeded to Kulinuu. About a thousand loyal natives had -collected; all were unarmed. A large bright Kapuan flag had been -brought ashore from the “Sitka” and O’Neil had bent it on to the -halliards of the tall flagstaff. - -When all was ready, the band struck up a stirring march and the lawful -king, Panu-Mafili, declared eligible by the chief justice, put in an -appearance. He was strongly escorted by sailors from both the English -and American war-ships. - -To Phil the ceremony was very impressive. The day was beautiful and -clear; a gentle breeze ruffled the deep green waters of the bay, and -stirred lazily the tall cocoanut palms overhead. The loyal natives, -supporters of Panu, in all their gorgeous coloring, and led by Tuamana, -rose to their feet and sang their savage song of welcome to their king -Malea-Toa Panu-Mafili. - -The chief justice conducted the ceremony. He first read his decision. -Then he gave the oath to Panu. As the judge finished he raised his -hand and the song to their king floated out upon the balmy air: “Panu -o Tupu-e-Kapua.” O’Neil and Marley hauled away on the halliards, and -as the great white, red and blue flag appeared above the tops of the -cocoanut trees, the three war-ships boomed forth a national salute in -its honor. The Herzovinian war-ship alone remained sullenly silent. - -Panu-Mafili was now the rightful king. Five miles away at Vaileli, -Kataafa and his five thousand warriors were camped. Panu could muster -barely a thousand men, and hardly a hundred guns. - -“We have him on the throne,” Phil heard the admiral exclaim as each -officer beginning with the American naval commander-in-chief pressed -forward to congratulate the young king. “But we’ve got to hold him on -with our bayonets.” - -At noon the British war-ship was under way, and standing out of the -harbor. Commander Tazewell, the midshipmen and Alice watched her go -from the consulate porch. - -“Where’s she going?” Alice asked in great surprise, for not an hour -ago the war-ship’s captain, Commander Sturdy, had been present at the -coronation of the new king. - -“She’s going to the island of Kulila,” Commander Tazewell told his -hearers guardedly, for there were many natives on the lawn in front -of the house and within ear-shot. “The island, you know, is about -sixty miles to windward[41] and the inhabitants are almost entirely -loyal to the Malea-Toa family, of which Panu is the acknowledged head. -Commander Sturdy has agreed to bring a shipload of natives and arm them -from his own stock of guns. That will give us at least five hundred -reënforcements.” - -The allies at once began to prepare their forces for serious work. -Companies of the loyal natives were being mustered in with English and -American sailormen to lead them, while white officers were designated -to command the combinations made by joining several companies. In all, -a force of eight native companies of a hundred men each, armed with -American and English rifles, was encamped in the Malae under the -command of Lieutenant Tupper of the British cruiser; while encamped -along the main street of Ukula five hundred English and American -sailors were ready in addition to aid in repelling an attack by the -old fox Kataafa, who had been himself now declared a rebel by Admiral -Spotts. - -The count and Klinger did not long remain in Ukula. That afternoon they -departed quietly to Vaileli plantation. - -During the afternoon Phil and Sydney rode with Commander Tazewell along -the Siumu road. All three were armed with revolvers, but no sailors or -natives were taken along. - -“Kataafa has written the admiral the most remarkable letter,” -the captain said after they had left behind the last vestige of -civilization. “He says that he does not question the right of -Panu-Mafili to be king, but that by the Kapuan custom he also is king, -and that according to their traditional custom, as old as their race, -he will fight Panu for the office. He says that he has no war with the -white men, and that no harm will come to them if they do not attack -him.” - -“What answer did the admiral send back?” Phil and Sydney asked in a -breath. - -“That Panu-Mafili was now under the protection of the two allied -powers, and that if Kataafa attacked him the admiral would consider it -an attack upon his own men, and that by so doing Kataafa would have -brought on a war with the white men.” - -“Hello,” Sydney exclaimed suddenly reining in his horse. A party -of natives, their faces blackened, had silently come from the bush -and barred their way. A chief stepped forward and courteously told -Commander Tazewell that no one should pass. - -While they consulted with the native, many warriors appeared from each -side of the road and gazed in friendly curiosity at their visitors. - -“He says,” Commander Tazewell told the midshipmen, “that Kataafa’s -troops have surrounded the village of Ukula, and will starve out the -inhabitants instead of attacking. That Kataafa has given orders that -white men shall not be molested, but must remain within the besieging -lines.” - -“Starve them out!” Phil exclaimed. “Why, that’s impossible. They can -catch fish and eat fruit.” The Americans had withdrawn some yards from -the natives, but remained to observe further. - -“How long do you suppose the supply of fruit would last?” Commander -Tazewell asked. “Besides, many of the fruit trees in Ukula have been -destroyed, and it will take a year for them to again bear fruit. And as -for fish, the reefs off Ukula are not good fishing ground, and would -not feed one-tenth of the population now gathered in the vicinity of -the town.” - -“Then what are we going to do?” Phil asked earnestly. - -“The war-ships will have to give the natives food from their own -supplies,” the commander replied. “Kataafa is a wily old fox, or else -that Herzovinian count is ably advising him. But come,” he added, -swinging his pony about; “we have received interesting news, and if we -are to succeed in this affair, we’ve got to take the offensive. The -food supplies on our ships would be devoured by the horde of natives in -the town inside of a week. We shall have to attack Kataafa in order to -feed our native allies.” - -Sydney had been examining the locality where the greater number of -natives had shown themselves in their curiosity to see the white men. A -gleam of white caught his eye, and before the warriors that had barred -the passage of the horsemen could interfere, he had urged his horse -ahead a few score of yards. An agile native grasped firmly the horse’s -bridle and turned Sydney back toward his companions, but not until he -had solved the mystery of that gleam of white. - -“Captain ‘Bully’ Scott was with that outfit,” Sydney exclaimed as they -trotted swiftly toward home. “I distinctly saw him, hidden behind a -barricade of earth and banana trees; he was in white clothes, and I saw -him distinctly, gray whiskers and all.” - -“It isn’t likely he will remain idle,” Commander Tazewell replied, not -at all surprised at Sydney’s news. “He cannot have any great friendship -for us after we have confiscated his schooner, and he knows if he is -caught by either an American or an English war-ship he will have to -serve a term in jail for his many crimes.” - -“It’s a pity he wasn’t on board the ‘Talofa’ when we captured her,” -Phil said. “Now if his character is as black as Stump paints it, he -will give us lots of trouble.” - -Commander Tazewell nodded his head gravely. - -“If the count, Klinger and Scott could be disposed of we would find -these fine fellows of Kapuans only too willing to bury the hatchet,” -he exclaimed, “but those three men are like vinegar in the molasses -barrel. If blood is shed it will be upon their heads.” - - - - -CHAPTER XXI - -A RECONNAISSANCE - - -A Herzovinian war-ship had come to join the four other men-of-war, all -anchored inside the narrow harbor of Ukula. - -The Herzovinian consul at once went on board the newcomer, and -afterward he and her captain passed through the allied lines on their -way to Vaileli. - -That evening many were the rumors in Ukula. Alice and Avao collected -the stories from the women. - -“Herzovinia has accepted Kataafa’s allegiance, and will aid him to -conquer and then annex the islands,” Alice told the midshipmen that -evening, “and also,” she exclaimed, “the women say that Kataafa has -been persuaded to make a big attack on the town.” - -“I can hardly believe it,” Phil declared, “but apparently the admiral -is not willing for us to remain passive in our defense. Have you -heard,” he asked, “about the expedition to-morrow?” - -Alice shook her head, her eyes big with excitement. “Where?” she asked. - -“No one knows,” Phil answered. “We start at daylight.” - -The next morning before dawn a force of one hundred sailors, consisting -of both English and Americans, had been formed in column of march on -the Ukula road. A machine gun, mounted on a light carriage and hauled -by hand, formed a part of the expedition. The midshipmen were detailed -to go along as aides to the commanding officer, Lieutenant Tupper. - -“We’re going to reconnoiter Vaileli plantation, I hear,” Sydney said as -he and Phil drank their coffee preparatory to joining the expedition, -“and gather food for the natives in the town.” - -“Mind, sir, it’s a ticklish business we’re starting out on,” O’Neil -said confidentially to the lads as they joined him. The boatswain’s -mate commanded one of the new companies of native troops, but had -volunteered to go along, after learning that no native troops were to -take part in the expedition. “If we do this at all we should take all -the force we’ve got and fall upon them good and hard. Half measures, -sir, are dangerous.” - -The column started just as the first streaks of dawn appeared in the -eastern sky. They traveled by the road which followed close to the -beach. On one side was the sea and the other the impenetrable bush. Out -beyond the reef the “Sitka” steamed slowly along to guard them in case -of an attack by a force beyond their strength to oppose. - -The expedition reached the Vaileli plantation by eight o’clock and -halted on the same ground where only a few nights before the Kataafa -warriors had held their celebrations. No warriors so far had been -encountered. The only outward evidence of hostilities were the empty -villages passed en route. - -A number of cleverly built forts and barricades along the road had been -encountered and destroyed by the sailors en route. - -“They’ve all been occupied recently,” Lieutenant Tupper declared, “and -they are not of native design. Some white man’s hand has guided them in -their construction, that is evident.” - -The “Sitka” had entered between the reefs and dropped anchor in deep -water within a half mile of the shore. - -Lieutenant Tupper with several officers, and among them the midshipmen, -approached the plantation house. They saw many black boys, Solomon -Islanders, working about the place, but not a white man or a Kapuan was -visible. - -Klinger finally appeared. Phil saw that he was pale and looked worried. - -“Where are the Kataafa men?” the lieutenant asked brusquely. “I see -you’ve been feeding and sheltering them,” he added insinuatingly, “and -doubtless are now concealing their whereabouts.” - -“I do not know,” Klinger replied stubbornly. “I cannot help it if they -take my fruit. I have no sailors to protect my property.” - -“I’ve a good mind to take you back with us,” the lieutenant said -angrily. “You and that count are advising these natives to fight us. -Who else is in the house?” Tupper asked, advancing upon the porch. - -Klinger held his ground. - -“There are no others here,” he replied. “You are welcome to search the -house if you desire, but I warn you this is Herzovinian property, and -you must answer for all insults.” - -“I’d like to see you strung to a yard-arm,” Lieutenant Tupper -exclaimed, angrier than ever at the man’s cool effrontery. - -Phil surprised a sinister gleam in Klinger’s eyes that gave him a -sudden pang of uneasiness. Did Klinger know where Kataafa and his -warriors were hiding? - -“We are going to requisition your fruit,” the lieutenant said -authoritatively. “You can put in your claim for damages, and if I have -anything to say in the matter you wouldn’t get a shilling.” - -The sailors had spread out through the beautiful groves of banana and -breadfruit trees and were quickly stripping the trees of their fruit -and carrying the great bunches down to the beach, where they were being -loaded into the cutters of the war-ship. - -“There won’t be enough to feed a locust on when they get through,” -O’Neil chuckled. “I’d like to get a hold on that fellow Klinger alone -for about ten minutes. I have an idea he knows where Kataafa and his -men are this very minute.” - -“We’re not looking for a fight,” Sydney said, shaking his head -emphatically. “We’re only making a reconnaissance and bringing back -food for the town. That’s why no natives were brought along.” - -“I don’t like the looks of it,” O’Neil declared. “We sent word to -Kataafa that unless he attacked we would not disturb him for the -present, and he is said to have said the same thing to us. In that case -what is he hiding for?” - -“Maybe he fears either we or he cannot keep their word,” Phil suggested. - -O’Neil shook his head. - -“Look out for a trick,” the sailor insisted, “and besides, I hear Chief -Tuatele commands the natives in the Vaileli district, and he is the -meanest Kapuan ever born. In fact, they say he has a mixture of Solomon -Islander in him.” - -Lieutenant Morrison and Ensign Patterson from the “Sitka” had listened -to the sailor’s remarks, and nodded their heads in agreement with his -views. - -“It’s queer we have met no women,” Lieutenant Morrison said in his -quiet, thoughtful voice, “but of course we go back by the beach road -the way we came, and with the guns of the ‘Sitka’ to back us, I can’t -believe that even Chief Tuatele would dare attack.” - -“Let him attack,” Patterson exclaimed. “We’ve got a hundred rifles and -a machine gun. I guess he won’t find us such an awfully easy mark.” - -The last boat load of fruit had been sent off to the “Sitka” when the -English lieutenant in command of the expedition formed his column for -the return march. - -“The king of France marched up the hill and then marched down again,” -he laughed as he gave the command to set the column in motion. - -Lieutenant Tupper was in the lead. The road stretched along the -seashore, winding in and out in conforming to the irregularities of the -beach. - -“I say,” Lieutenant Tupper suddenly exclaimed, “isn’t that road to the -left a short cut?” He took out a small pocket chart and consulted it. -Then he glanced out to the “Sitka,” which had gotten under way and -was following, as before, just beyond the surf on the outer reef. “It -will save us nearly a mile, and is shady, all the way, through cocoanut -groves.” - -His mind was made up without more ado, and the head of the column -wheeled to the left away from the sea and their supporting war-ship and -took the trail leading through the woods. - -“Anybody got any wire cutters?” O’Neil asked Phil, who was walking -at his side. “Look, sir, both sides barbed wire. Nasty thing to get -through in a hurry.” - -Phil saw that on each side of the road ran a substantially built fence -of barbed wire as high as a man’s head. The woods here were not very -thick. Cocoanut and other trees were plentifully mixed. - -They had now reached the top of a rise. The road from there led down -and at the bottom a small, swift stream would have to be forded. - -The machine gun was being dragged by its crew between the two companies -of sailors. As the head of the column entered the stream it was found -that the water was deeper than where it had been crossed nearer its -mouth. Phil and Sydney were told to warn the machine gun’s crew, and -have the rear company give aid if they needed it to get the gun across -safely. - -The midshipmen left the head of the column just as it was on the point -of entering the mountain stream. Phil looked behind as they ran rapidly -back toward the machine gun. - -“The water’s above the men’s waists,” he exclaimed. - -Lieutenant Morrison was waiting at the machine gun when Phil arrived to -tell him of the depth of the stream which they were about to cross. - -“Childers,” the lieutenant said quietly to the gunner’s mate in charge -of the delicate weapon, “better dismount the gun and have it carried -across by hand. We cannot afford to run the risk of getting the -mechanism wet.” He looked about him and Phil read apprehension in his -eyes. “I think it would have been wiser to have returned by the beach -road,” he added uncomplainingly, but Phil thought only too truly. - -“Aye, aye, sir,” Childers replied, and as the gun carriage was brought -to a stop four men picked up the gun, raising it upon their shoulders. -Childers removed the breech mechanism for fear it would fall out. The -men with the gun on their shoulders waded into the icy cold water. - -The advance company had gone on barely a hundred yards beyond the -river, and there had halted to permit the rear company and the machine -gun to catch up. - -The men on the drag ropes of the gun mount were on dry land when the -midshipmen left Lieutenant Morrison, with whom they had been walking, -and started ahead to rejoin the leader. - -A savage cry from out the jungle on the left brought the entire command -to immediate attention. The cry was taken up and increased in volume -until the woods rang, and then suddenly came a scattering volley of -musketry fire. - -Phil and Sydney drew their revolvers. They had halted, gazing in -bewilderment into the dense bush, from which there continued to come a -multitude of savage shouts with a scorching rifle fire. The sailors -ahead had deployed along the road and were excitedly but blindly firing. - -Phil gazed behind him and saw the machine gun had been hurriedly -replaced upon its mount, yet the gunner’s mate, Childers, was storming -furiously at the men about him. They had dipped the breech of the gun -into the water in their sudden shock and surprise at the weirdness of -the attack. - -Phil hastened back in hopes of being able to lend a hand: his -familiarity with the gun qualified him for the task, but Childers had -already deftly put back the mechanism and was about to feed in the -cartridge tape carrying the ammunition. - -“Got any oil?” Phil asked excitedly. - -Childers pointed to a can in the accessory box whose top was open. -Phil unscrewed the top of the oil can and poured its contents over the -wetted breech and into the mechanism. - -“Bring up the gun,” was the cry from the advance company. - -With a rush the sailors carried the gun and carriage up the road and -swung its muzzle toward the concealed foes. - -Childers snapped a cartridge in place while Lieutenant Morrison, -seating himself upon the trail of the mount, pointed and pulled the -trigger. One shot was heard and then the mechanism jammed. - -Again Childers drew back the gas lever, but only one shot could be -fired. - -“It’s put together wrong,” the gunner’s mate cried out aghast as he -slipped out the bolt and examined it. - -“The Colt gun won’t work!” was the disheartening news that spread up -and down the line. The unseen enemy had now become bolder. Many of them -disregarding the danger, in their exultation, revealed their half-naked -bodies from behind trees, while the sailors made good their expended -ammunition in dropping these in their tracks. The white men were being -attacked from all sides save one and the volume of fire told only too -plainly that nearly a thousand rifles were against them. - -“We’ve got to get off this road and take cover,” Phil cried in -exasperation as he saw men drop sorely hit near him. Lieutenant -Morrison’s face was pale and as he rose from his seat on the gun -carriage, he steadied himself upon Patterson’s shoulder. His right leg -hung useless; a bullet had shattered the bone below the knee. - -The two midshipmen seized bayonets from the guns of those fallen and -began to hack away at the barbed wire fence in their rear. Others now -joined them, while the most part of the sailors threw themselves upon -the ground and continued their fire at the flitting figures, only -seldom and then dimly visible within the impenetrable bush, on their -front and flank. - -Lieutenant Tupper was already severely wounded, but he saw that to save -his men a retreat was urgently necessary. To remain there in the open -was useless and would prove costly if not destructive. - -The sailors retreated slowly through the places in the fence, cut -laboriously with the bayonets. - -“The gun must be abandoned, Childers,” Lieutenant Morrison exclaimed in -despair, after they had dragged it through the torn fence and Childers -had made a last heroic effort to disassemble the breech mechanism in -order to locate and repair the defect. - -The rebel natives perceiving the retreat threw caution to the winds and -now showed themselves in a savage swarm. The sailors made a desperate -stand, and at such close range the execution among their delirious -enemies was great; but nothing could stop their mad rush. - -Phil clung to his wounded lieutenant on one side, while Patterson -supported him on the other. - -Cries for mercy could be heard behind them, where a wounded sailor was -discovered by the eager savages. Then triumphant yells and a scream of -terror told the horrible story of the poor fellow’s end. - -“Leave me,” Lieutenant Morrison begged them. “Save yourselves.” - -The natives were almost within reach when Lieutenant Morrison’s body -suddenly sank to the ground. A second bullet had reached a vital spot. -Phil stopped. Patterson was behind him. He had emptied his revolver -with telling effect in holding the enemy at bay in an endeavor to cover -the retreat of his stricken friend. Phil now sprang to the ensign’s aid -and as he did so he could have cried out for joy, for there was O’Neil -at his side, cool and collected, among the terrible dangers, firing -his rifle from its magazine. Each shot carried a message of death. - -“Run, both of you,” the sailor cried out to them. Phil saw Patterson -reel, and caught him in his arms. The lad turned the ensign toward him -and a great sob of anguish escaped his lips as he saw the death pallor -already on the stricken officer’s face. The next moment the lifeless -body fell at his feet, and almost touching the lifeless body of the -friend for whom he had heroically but fruitlessly given his young life. - -Turning upon the enemy, who had now hesitated in their advance in face -of such unexpected resistance, Phil fired his revolver until empty. -Then a crash and a mighty explosion almost threw him to the ground. - -“Quick, sir, run; those are our shells,” O’Neil exclaimed, and together -the two raced for the beach, guided in their flight by the discharges -from the guns of the “Sitka,” while behind them the rebel natives -were left to exult over their victory. Again the invincible white -man--papalangi--had been found to be only mortal. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII - -WAR IN EARNEST - - -When Phil and O’Neil reached the beach, the “Sitka’s” shells were -screeching angrily over their heads and exploding in the bush behind -them. The sailors had been collected and formed on the beach road -to repel an attack. Three officers and eight sailors were missing -and a score had received wounds. The command of the force fell to a -sub-lieutenant from the English cruiser. Tupper, Morrison and Patterson -had been killed and left upon the field. - -“There were at least a thousand of them,” Sydney exclaimed as he met -Phil and grasped his hand silently, thankful for his escape, “and Scott -or some white man was with them. Many of the men say they distinctly -heard a white man’s voice encouraging the natives to charge us.” - -The sailors were apathetic, stunned. The suddenness of the attack and -their defeat had unnerved every man of them. - -“If we could only have used the machine gun,” Childers moaned -plaintively, “we’d have had a different story to tell.” - -Little by little the men’s shattered nerves were mended. The “Sitka’s” -shells yet screeched overhead, but the rebel natives had retired. - -The commanding officer gave the order and put the force in motion. It -was a sadly disheartened band that entered the town of Ukula an hour -later. - -When the doleful news reached the American admiral, he was beside -himself with anger at the white men whom he firmly believed had -instigated and made possible the ambush. Far from yielding, all effort -was now ordered to be concentrated upon swift punishment to the rebels. - -Lieutenant Gant came ashore from the British ship to command all -the loyal native troops. Several hundred loyal warriors were now -added, having been brought from Kulila. One thousand strong they -were mustered, and all were armed with the latest patterns of the -Lee Metford rifle from the British and American war-ships. The white -troops, unused to bush fighting, by the admiral’s order were hereafter -only to garrison the town, while offensive work was to be done -exclusively by the loyal native troops. A plentiful supply of white -sailors was sprinkled among the native companies, to teach them how to -use their weapons and how to take cover. - -Through the women the fate of the fallen officers and sailors was -learned. All had been beheaded; but Kataafa when he learned of this -savage act had ordered the bodies and heads to be buried and their -graves marked. - -Phil and Sydney were given commands in the native regiment, and O’Neil -went with them. - -All day and every day they drilled their men. Meanwhile the rebels were -drawing their lines closer about Ukula. - -The Herzovinian consul had, immediately after the unfortunate fight -with the rebels, gone in person to offer his sympathy to the admiral -for the sad loss of life. Admiral Spotts received him in stony silence. -He listened to his words but vouchsafed no answer, nor even thanked him -for his sympathy. - -“Against his countrymen, whom he should control,” the admiral exclaimed -to Commanders Tazewell and Sturdy, after the discomfited consul had -departed, “the blood of every man killed in these islands should -righteously cry out vengeance.” - -Phil, who had been present, repeated the admiral’s words to O’Neil. The -sailorman nodded his head in silence for several minutes. - -“What were you going to say?” Phil asked quickly. He had seen a look in -O’Neil’s eyes, and knew that the sailor was looking at the sad episode -from a different standpoint. - -“Well, sir,” O’Neil replied apologetically, “I am not saying the -admiral isn’t dead right. That count and Klinger have sure brought on -this war and are responsible for the men killed. But, sir,” he added, -“I was here when twenty Herzovinian sailors were killed and their heads -taken by this same Kataafa. They were killed by bullets furnished by -Americans and Englishmen. They blamed us then--we blame them now. - -“Don’t you see, sir,” he added earnestly, “the Herzovinians think -we are now ‘quits.’ They lost twenty sailors; we have lost eleven, -including three officers.” - -“Now,” Sydney said thoughtfully, “is the time for the white men to get -together and stop this useless war.” - -Phil and O’Neil gazed at him in surprise. - -“When we have lost our first battle,” Phil exclaimed scornfully. -“Why, Syd, that is contrary to human nature. The Herzovinians might -be willing to compromise, but we cannot accept a truce until we have -proved that our courage has not been affected. When we have driven -Kataafa away from Ukula, then we might be willing to treat for an -armistice, but never before.” - -“I agree with the humanitarian view of Mr. Monroe,” a voice from behind -them said solemnly. The lads turned to find Judge Lindsay beside them, -smiling in fatherly fashion upon them. “Now is the moment of moments -to bring together the warring factions. To do so,” he added, “we must -sacrifice some of our selfish pride. But we would thus spare innocent -human lives. - -“Have you heard that Klinger has been arrested, and is now held in -jail by our naval forces for the crime of instigating the rebels to -attack our sailors?” he asked. The judge spoke without sign of feeling. - -“I cannot see,” he said after a pause, “what evidence they have against -him. He supplied guns to natives to fight natives. That they used their -weapons against the white men I am sure was not his wish.” - -“Begging your worship’s pardon,” O’Neil said respectfully, “Klinger was -here ten years ago, and saw twenty of his countrymen killed through the -work of white men of our race. Do you believe, sir, he has forgotten -that? Klinger has no fear. When we stood and talked with him at Vaileli -before the fight, I thought I saw a look in his face, like one who -believes something for which he has long wished was about to happen. -He didn’t owe us anything, and the line of talk we gave him didn’t -make him feel any the more kindly toward us. I am dead sure now that -he knew that Kataafa’s warriors were between us and Ukula, waiting to -attack us, but the memory of the monument in Kulinuu for the martyred -Herzovinian sailors kept his mouth shut tight. No, sir, he let us go -to our defeat almost with joy in his heart, and somehow,” O’Neil added -solemnly, almost reverentially, “when I remember that terrible day, -just before the hurricane that wrecked us all, I haven’t it in my heart -to blame him.” - -“So you were here then,” the judge exclaimed in surprise and interest. -“Well, I wish I could be the instrument to bring together the two -sides, and bring peace to these beautiful islands; but I suppose the -blood of our poor fellows cries out for atonement, and we must fight -on.” - -Lieutenant Gant with his native regiment was almost ready to take the -offensive. - -“We’ve got to be mighty keen about it,” he exclaimed to some of his -officers. “A cable is on the way to New Zealand by the mail ship that -left to-day. The Powers will soon put a stop to this show when they -learn the results of our first battle.” - -But before Gant could take the field to retrieve the defeat, Kataafa -became suddenly bold and advanced his lines within a couple of hundred -yards of the allies. They moved during the night, and strange as it -may seem women did not bring the news beforehand. - -Matautu was the point of attack, and the foreign resident section was -swept by bullets. - -The natives taunted each other from their earth intrenchments, firing -wildly, but neither side made an attempt to leave the protection of -their forts and attack. - -Across the Fuisa River on the east of Matautu the Kataafa and Panu -warriors faced each other, and here Lieutenant Gant had despatched -several native companies of reënforcements to hold the road leading -into Ukula. - -The sailors, by order of the admiral, had been held in reserve. They -were only to be used in case Kataafa undertook to rush the earthwork -defenses. They held the second line of defense. - -[Illustration: HE DID NOT FIRE] - -“It’s a perfect shame,” O’Neil exclaimed disgustedly, “to see these -fellows throw away their ammunition. Why, a squad of sailors could -have picked off twenty of those blackened faced natives across there -in the last ten minutes.” He picked up the rifle that had been idly -lying beside him in the trench and adjusted the sight to two hundred -yards. “Watch me lay out the next fellow who gets funny and jumps on -top of his fort and shakes his fist at us.” - -The midshipmen watched him interestedly, for O’Neil was a dead shot. - -Suddenly a fine looking warrior leaped upon the trench, brandishing his -gun and head knife, using the forceful but picturesque Kapuan tongue in -boasts and taunts, hurling them upon all those of his enemies across -the river. - -O’Neil calmly raised his gun, but he did not fire. He dropped it into -the hollow of his arm. - -“It’s too much like murder,” he said, and both midshipmen breathed a -sigh of relief. - -“This isn’t war,” Phil complained bitterly. “We are fighting children. -I’d as soon shoot a schoolboy showing himself in bravado from the top -of his snow fort as to shoot at those joyful warriors. To them fighting -is fun. They do not realize that they are uselessly destroying human -life.” - -“Look!” Sydney exclaimed in admiration, as a Kataafa warrior was seen -to rush into the river a few hundred yards above them and endeavor to -reach the body of a native whom he had slain. A rain of bullets fell -all around him, and as he reached the side of his victim, his head axe -raised, he fell dead. So excited had both sides become that no thought -of personal safety was given. Both sides stood upon the top of their -trenches and uttered their savage cries of defiance. The Kataafa men -who had cheered on their hero, exulting in the prospect of a trophy, -saw themselves suddenly exposed to a disgrace. - -“We ought to stop it,” Sydney exclaimed. “Look at our men exposing -themselves needlessly.” - -“You might as well try damming Niagara first,” Phil returned. “It would -be an easier job.” - -“There’s the real thing for you,” O’Neil cried, bringing his rifle up -to his shoulder as a lithe Kataafa native darted across the intervening -water scarcely half waist deep, swung the dead body of his friend upon -his back and returned to his trenches unscathed. - -“If they don’t stop this foolishness,” the sailor said, “I’m going to -teach ’em a lesson.” He lowered his rifle from his shoulder. “I could -have dropped him a half a dozen times,” he complained, “and yet these -wild savages have wasted a barrel of lead shooting at him, and not a -single hit.” - -The excitement along the Fuisa River began to die down after this last -piece of bravado. O’Neil and the midshipmen had sent word to the chiefs -in their vicinity to save their ammunition. - -About three o’clock those at the Fuisa River were much concerned over -heavy musketry fire behind them and on the right flank of the allied -position. A woman came along the road from Ukula, carrying fruit for -her relatives in the trenches. - -O’Neil spoke to her, inquiring the cause of the firing. She answered -quite calmly and passed on down the trench. - -“She says she heard Kataafa would attack along the Siumu road, and -supposed that was the cause of the firing,” O’Neil explained. “There -goes the artillery,” he exclaimed, as all distinctly heard the crash -from the village in their rear where some English howitzers were -mounted. “They must have driven the natives back. Look out!” he cried -suddenly. - -There was no need for further warning. The midshipmen, glancing up -over the top of the trench, saw the Kataafa warriors were beyond their -trench and advancing toward the river, firing, gesticulating, taunting, -dancing and singing. A hail of bullets met them from the Panu side; but -nothing seemed able to stop the movement. - -The contending factions were about equal in numbers. The Kataafa men -having willingly abandoned their trench to fight in the open, their -enemy, not to be outdone in chivalry, bravely mounted on top of their -own earthworks and awaited the attack. Meanwhile both sides fired -blindly. Neither side took time to aim. Even with such poor fire -direction, however, many men on both sides were being hit. - -O’Neil and the two midshipmen had gotten suddenly over their hesitancy -in shooting down a native enemy, and their example was being followed -by about fifty white men, after endeavoring in vain to keep their -natives under cover. - -“Pick out the leaders,” O’Neil exclaimed. “I got that fellow. I am -sorry! he was such a fine looker.” Again he fired, and each time his -exclamations told the result of his shot. - -Phil and Sydney realized that it was not a matter of choice. That rush -had to be stopped, even if the entire force against them was wiped out, -and they loaded and fired eagerly, but carefully, every shot bringing -down an enemy. - -“They’ve had enough!” Sydney cried joyously. Those near had turned and -were fleeing back across the stream. Once the panic had seized them, -the entire Kataafa force was fleeing for cover. - -“Now after them,” O’Neil suggested to the midshipmen, and this same -thought had apparently come to every white sailor along the loyal -line. An English sub-lieutenant some hundred yards above had begun the -sortie, and presently the whole line was in the river advancing rapidly -after their fleeing foe. - -Breathless, Phil found himself in the enemy’s trenches. The natives had -dashed on into the bush to pursue their broken foe. - -The trench made by Kataafa was quickly razed and again the loyal -warriors were quietly, yet joyously, back in their own forts. - -It was not until this lull in the fighting that the midshipmen realized -the extent of the attack upon the center of the allies’ position along -the Siumu road. The firing seemed closer and in greater volume. The -howitzers had been reënforced by Gatlings and pom-poms, or one-pounder -automatic cannon, from the English ship. - -“I say, that looks as if the big attack were down there,” the -sub-lieutenant exclaimed anxiously. He had come down to talk with the -midshipmen. “Suppose you take your company and see if they need help. -After that rush I think we have more than plenty to keep them off here.” - -Phil, Sydney and O’Neil led forth about one hundred excited natives -on a run through Matautu. In front of the legations two companies -of American sailors, forming the reserve for the flank which the -midshipmen had just left, hurriedly joined on behind. - -Ahead, in front of the Tivoli Hotel, the artillery could be seen firing -down the Siumu road. The air was full of flying bullets, apparently -coming from all directions. The entire stretch of road from the -American consulate was bullet swept. Phil saw that it was deserted, -but he could not stop to take cover. It was evident that on the Siumu -road the biggest attack was being made. As the natives and sailors -approached Phil saw several companies of white men advancing from the -other direction. He soon recognized the English from Kulinuu, coming to -reënforce the center. - -Lieutenant Gant, mounted upon a pony, in all that hail of bullets came -galloping toward the midshipmen. - -“Go straight down the road,” he ordered. Phil marveled at his calmness. -“They’ve driven our natives back almost into the town. The guns are -shelling behind them. It’s only making noise. We can’t shoot into them -for fear of hitting our own.” - -The extra three hundred arriving turned the tide of battle. The Panu -natives, encouraged by their white officers and sailors from the -war-ships, now turned and charged their enemy. The impetus of the -reënforcements carried them through the front ranks of the enemy and -into the middle of the horde. Out in the jungle the natives spread -out, and each line was quickly reënforced by squads of sailors. - -By four o’clock the attack had been repulsed, and the loyal natives and -their allies were again withdrawn into their forts. All the Kataafa -forts taken had been destroyed. - -Many heads were brought into the town, but these were ordered buried, -and the natives, after some grumbling, finally complied. - -Phil and Sydney saw the heads collected by native chiefs appointed by -Lieutenant Gant. One head in the gruesome pile gave him a start that -he will always remember. It was that once proudly carried by Captain -“Bully” Scott. The grayish whiskers and long matted locks of once black -hair, but now turning gray. The usually sun-brown face had turned to an -ashen pallor. Yet the likeness in death was as vivid as in life. - -Phil had the head taken up and wrapped in tapa cloth, and then carried -it to Commander Tazewell. - -In front of the Tivoli Hotel they found him. - -Phil quickly explained his mission. - -All retired inside the hotel while a box was ordered brought. - -Phil laid his ghastly relic on the floor and gingerly unwrapped it. - -All gazed upon it in silence. Commander Tazewell nodded, and Phil -rewrapped the head carefully and placed it within the box. - -As they left the hotel O’Neil brought up the native who claimed to have -taken the head. - -“He says he didn’t kill him,” O’Neil said, “but I think probably he -did, and is afraid to say so. He thinks we are displeased because it -was a white man.” - -“Who did it? Ask him,” Phil ordered. - -“He says a white man shot him. He saw it, and when the white man didn’t -take the head, he did,” O’Neil replied, after a short conversation. - -The native so closely questioned by these white officers was becoming -very much concerned. His eyes rolled from side to side seeking -apparently somebody to take his part. Finally he leaped away and -grabbing a man by the arm dragged him excitedly toward his inquisitors. - -It was Stump. - -“He kill! He kill!” the native cried out pointing his finger at the -surprised white man. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII - -CONCLUSION - - -Stump was not proud of his exploit. The lads saw that he trembled -violently, and his face showed that his nerves were unstrung. - -“It was my life or his,” he said sorrowfully. “Klinger had put me in -charge of the store when he was arrested. During the fight on the Siumu -road I was inside the store. Scott and several natives came from the -bush and made me go with them. I was afraid to refuse. They led me -away. Some time later our party was attacked by the Panu men. They did -not attack Captain Scott, who held me by the arm and told me he’d blow -my head off if I ran away. When the Kataafa men were running away Scott -saw that we must run too. He beat and kicked me to make me go faster. -I had been wounded in the left arm.” Here Stump showed his bandaged -arm. “The wound hurt me and made me desperate. By this time we were -surrounded by Panu men. I appealed to them for help, but they only -laughed. One man, however, came to me and handed me a gun. Scott did -not see what was done; he was dragging me along toward the retreating -Kataafa men. - -“The next thing I knew,” Stump declared, a strong fit of trembling -seizing him at the thought, “I had stuck the muzzle of the gun close to -his neck and pulled the trigger. He let go his hold of me and I ran. I -heard the shouts and laughter of the natives behind me.” - -“I reckon you won’t be hung for it,” O’Neil said consolingly. “The -killing of that scoundrel and pirate is probably the most useful thing -for humanity you’ve ever done, Stump. Now I advise you to dig out on -the next steamer and go home.” - -The defenders of Ukula at last were able to relax in a measure their -vigilance. The Kataafa warriors had been badly shattered, and further -attacks were not likely until they could replenish their store of -ammunition. The arrest of Klinger blocked one source of supply. Many -thousands of rounds fitting the enemy’s rifles had been found by the -allied sailors after a search of the Kapuan firm’s store. Kataafa had -probably counted upon the capture of Ukula long enough to restock his -expended ammunition. - -The midshipmen dined that evening with the Lees. Alice was eager to -hear the gruesome details of the fighting and was greatly surprised -when the lads declared that neither they nor O’Neil had been wounded. - -“How could you help being?” she asked doubtingly. “The air all -afternoon was full of lead. We all hid behind furniture stacked up like -a fort up-stairs. The house was hit, you know, lots of times.” - -“Where’s Avao?” Phil asked; he had not seen her for several days. - -“She was with her father in the trenches,” Alice replied, admiration in -her eyes. “She was here an hour ago and told us all about the fight.” - -“Yes,” Miss Lee added smiling upon her enthusiastic sister, “Alice was -restrained from being on the scene only by force. Father and I had all -we could do to keep her at home.” - -After dinner Admiral Spotts and Commander Tazewell came in to confer -with Mr. Lee. - -“I have just found out,” the admiral said, “that the Herzovinian -war-ship brought a refusal of annexation to Kataafa, and Count Rosen -was informed that he must act in concert with other nations to prevent -bloodshed. The count returns to-morrow in the mail steamer for -Australia.” - -At daylight the next morning Lieutenant Gant led his entire native -regiment over the road taken by the small force some days before. The -enemy was not encountered until they arrived at the Vaileli plantation. -There a few shots were exchanged, but the Kataafa men were not in force -and quickly scattered into the bush. The advance guard under Tuamana -pursued them and returned after a half hour’s chase with several native -heads, and besides carrying the body of a white man, who had been shot -and killed fleeing with the Kataafa men. It was the missing marine -orderly, Schultz. - -The regiment returned over the same road recently traversed by the -ill-fated party. The midshipmen and O’Neil sought for the Colt gun. -Childers had dismounted the breech mechanism during that disastrous -battle and brought it to the beach with him upon his retreat. The gun -had been taken away by the Kataafa warriors, although they were unable -to use it. No signs of bodies or arms were found; the victors had -carried away all spoils of their vanquished enemy. - -When the expedition reached Ukula, the mail steamer from San Francisco -was in port. The admiral, the war-ship captains and the three consuls -had held a meeting to discuss the instructions received in the mail -from their respective governments. - -“A commission has been appointed to finally decide the fate of Kapua,” -Commander Tazewell told the lads as they joined him after turning -over their native company to its native chief. “We are sending word -to Kataafa declaring a truce. He has retired with all his warriors to -Saluafata. Klinger will carry the message and the mail steamer is to -wait until he returns. Klinger has agreed to leave the islands. He and -Count Rosen go together.” - -The midshipmen were delighted. The war had ceased to be exciting. They -felt that the useless killing of natives should stop. It had gone too -far already. With Rosen, Klinger and Scott out of the way, a peaceful -settlement would be possible. - -They told the captain of the death of his unfaithful orderly and of -burying him at Vaileli. - -Commander Tazewell was thoughtful for several minutes. “Poor fellow,” -he said. “I suppose he could not withstand the golden bribe offered -him.” - -Kataafa sent in word that he agreed to suspend hostilities and would -remain in Saluafata, ten miles away from Ukula. - -The mail steamer departed, carrying with it the two men who had -overreached themselves in their patriotic endeavor to bring Kapua under -the control of their own nation. - -The American and English sailors and the natives loyal to Panu -meanwhile garrisoned and preserved order in Ukula and over the -surrounding country. - -Stump was rewarded and sent home on a mail steamer, promising to look -up his folks and turn over a new leaf. - -One day, several weeks after the last fight, another American war-ship -came to anchor in the harbor of Ukula. On board were three great -commissioners of the treaty powers. - -Two days later Phil and Sydney said good-bye to their friends in Ukula. -The war-ships “Sitka” and “Sacramento” were under orders to return to -the United States. - -As the two war-ships lifted their anchors, many canoes filled with -natives hung in the quiet water about them. The sweet plaintive air -of the Kapuan farewell song floated up to the ears of the midshipmen, -really sorry to leave behind those for whom they had formed a strong -bond of friendship. - -Some days later the midshipmen dined in the cabin with Commander -Tazewell. - -“What has Herzovinia gained in Kapua after all the years of stirring up -uncertainty and strife?” Sydney asked earnestly. - -“Her policy has been to prove to the other nations that the islands -are not worth the trouble to govern them,” the commander answered. -“She has proved that the three nation control cannot be carried on with -peace. She has lost her own sailors in fighting rebels and we have lost -ours. - -“She still persists in her desire for the islands. England and America -are almost on the point of giving up the struggle. You will find,” he -added, “that Herzovinia will be given most if not all of Kapua by the -commission now working for a settlement there.” - -The midshipmen remembered this accurate summing up when a month or so -later the decision of the commission was given out to the world. - -“Know what you want, and always keep wanting it and trying to get it; -it’s a cinch that you can’t miss it,” was O’Neil’s moral, derived from -his Kapuan experiences. - - -Other Stories in this Series are: - - A U. S. MIDSHIPMAN AFLOAT - A U. S. MIDSHIPMAN IN CHINA - A U. S. MIDSHIPMAN IN THE PHILIPPINES - A U. S. MIDSHIPMAN IN JAPAN - - - - -FOOTNOTES: - -[1] Kataafa is king of Kapua. - -[2] Tupu--King. - -[3] Talofa, Alii--Good-day, chief. - -[4] Papalangi--White person. - -[5] Tapa--Native cloth beaten out of mulberry bark. - -[6] Felinge--Literally friend, a benefactor. - -[7] Tapau--Princess of a village. - -[8] Leonga Alii--Bad chief. - -[9] Kapua Uma--The real Kapua. - -[10] Papasea--A waterfall. - -[11] Suva--A town in the Fiji. - -[12] Sea-lawyer--A sailor socialist. - -[13] Salt-horse--Salt pork. - -[14] Lava-lava--Loin cloth. - -[15] Kava Fa’a Kapua. Kava--A drink something like oat-meal water. -Fa’a--Native custom. - -[16] Alii--Chief. - -[17] Fomai--Doctor. - -[18] Strainer--Made of vegetable growth. - -[19] Hipu--Cup. - -[20] Fui--A bunch of long horsehair on the end of a short stick--used -by Kapuan chiefs to fan away the flies. - -[21] Tonga-fiti--A native word for a stratagem. - -[22] Kowtow--Chinese word for humbling oneself. - -[23] Buscar--Sailor and soldier slang to hunt for. - -[24] Lanai--A covered porch. - -[25] Talofa, Alii--Good-night, sir. - -[26] Savvys--Understands. - -[27] The Tapau is the leader of the dance called the Siva-Siva, that -requires much grace and dexterity. - -[28] Fono--Native council. - -[29] Kataafa is the king of Kapua. - -[30] Alii papalangi--White chiefs. - -[31] Meliti--Native for American. - -[32] Cry--Appeal. - -[33] Turning off--Springing the trap. - -[34] Malae--Square. - -[35] Solomon Islanders are black; Kapuans are brown. - -[36] Tofa, Alii--Good-bye, chief. - -[37] Amuck--A form of insanity where the person affected desires to -kill. - -[38] Talola--A ceremony of giving presents to the one honored. - -[39] Fa’a moli-moli--Excuse me. - -[40] Faimalosi--Go it. - -[41] The prevailing wind in the islands of the South Seas is -southeast--so “windward” or “leeward” means easterly or westerly in -direction. - - - - -TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES: - - - Italicized text is surrounded by underscores: _italics_. - - Obvious typographical errors have been corrected. - - Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized. - - Archaic or alternate spelling has been retained from the original. - - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN IN -THE SOUTH SEAS *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |